JP2019150285A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing game interest from becoming lost.SOLUTION: Performance control means: can execute a main variable display game on the basis of entering of a game ball into a main region; can execute a sub variable display game on the basis of entering of a game ball into a sub region; can place both the main variable display game and the sub variable display game in an executing state; when the sub variable display game shows a first special result, terminates the main variable display game with the main variable display game showing a specific result, and executes a switching performance for displaying, on the display device, the specific result of the main variable display game and the first special result of the sub variable display game in a switched manner; and does not execute a blessing performance for notification that the first special game state is blessed, which is generated when the first special result is shown by the sub variable display game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 155

Description

The present invention comprises an effect control means capable of displaying on a display device a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the first start area or the second start area. The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a result of a display game is a special result.

Conventionally, a first gaming state (for example, a left-handed state) in which the first starting region is a main starting region (main region) in which game balls are recommended to enter and the second starting region is a sub-starting region (subordinate region). ) And a second gaming state (for example, a right-handed state) in which the second starting region is a main starting region in which game balls are recommended to be entered and the first starting region is a sub-starting region. There is a gaming machine (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-148127 A

However, in a conventional gaming machine, when a special game state (a small hit state or a big hit state) occurs due to a main variation display game based on a game ball entering the main start area, If a special game state (a small hit state or a big hit state) is generated by the follow-up display game based on the entry, a game may be less interesting.

  An object of this invention is to prevent the fall of the interest of a game.

In a representative embodiment of the present invention, effect control that can display a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner on a display device based on a game ball entering the first start area or the second start area A gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, and entering a game ball into the first starting area is recommended, A first gaming state in which the first starting area is a main area and the second starting area is a sub-area, and the entry of game balls into the second starting area is recommended, and the second starting area is And a second game state in which the first start area is a sub-area, and the effect control means displays a main variation display based on a game ball entering the main area. A game can be executed and a game ball enters the slave area Based being capable of performing slave variable display games, the the main variable display games, it is possible to the state of running both said slave variable display games,
When the result of the follow variation display game is a first special result, the main variation display game is ended and the main variation display game is set as the specific result, and the specific result of the main variation display game and the follow variation display are displayed. Occurrence of a first special gaming state that occurs when a change effect for switching and displaying the first special result of the game on the display device is executed, and the result of the follow-up display game becomes the first special result Do not perform the blessing production that blesses and informs you.

  According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of a game.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a batch display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the lighting aspect of the various display parts of a package display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of the special figure 1 indicator. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of the special figure 2 indicator. It is another figure which shows the lighting mode of the special figure 2 indicator. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production control system of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main process of game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half part of the main process of game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an input process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fraud & winning prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an effect command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation | variation monitoring process. It is a time chart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing. FIG. 2 is another time chart for explaining the abnormal fluctuation monitoring process. FIG. 7 is still another time chart for explaining the abnormal fluctuation monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure start port 1 switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure start port 2 switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure pending | holding information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big winning opening switch monitoring process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a routine process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a routine processing procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a table which illustrates a big hit probability, a small hit probability, and a loss probability. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation | variation start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the high probability variation frequency update process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a process transition setting process during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a process transition setting process during fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 1 display process transfer setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 2 display process transition setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 1 display process transition setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 2 display process transition setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the process during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the process during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fanfare / interval process transfer setting process. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a process transition setting process during small hitting fanfare. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a process transition setting process during small hitting fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during a special winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big winning opening residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during small hitting fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the middle hit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit remaining ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 small hits end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a symbol fluctuation | variation control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a start port 1 signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a symbol fixed frequency signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the process during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 1 big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 1 small hits end process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 2 small hit | end process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of single-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the second half part of a single command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a change interruption setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation resumption setting process. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch symbol type command processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation type command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a fluctuation | interruption setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation resumption setting process. It is a time chart (timing chart) which shows a mode that a fluctuation | variation display game is forcibly terminated. It is a time chart which shows a mode that a fluctuation display game is interrupted and restarted. (A) Special figure 1 It is a time chart which shows the case where the fluctuation time timer of a special figure 2 variable display game is updated at the time of a stop of a variable display game. (B) It is a time chart which shows the case where it does not update. (A) Special figure 1 is a time chart showing a state in which a delay timer (wait time) for delaying the restart of the variable display game is not set. (B) Special figure 2 is a time chart showing how to set a delay timer (wait time) for delaying the restart of the variable display game. (A) Special figure 2 It is a time chart which shows a mode that the delay timer (waiting time) of a fluctuation display game is set irrespective of the fluctuation display state of a game. (B) Special figure 1 is a time chart showing a state in which a delay timer (wait time) for delaying the restart of the variable display game is not set. It is a time chart which shows a process in case there is a possibility that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game will end at the same timing. It is a time chart which shows an example of a process when there is a power failure during interruption of the variable display game and the power failure is recovered (power on). It is a time chart which shows the other example of a process when there is a power failure during interruption of a variable display game, and a power failure is recovered | restored after that (power-on). It is a front view of the game board with which the game machine in a 2nd embodiment is equipped. It is a figure which shows the structure of the lamp display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the package display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lighting aspect of the various display parts which comprise the package display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of the game control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the game state transition diagram (game flow) which shows the transition of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a table which illustrates the big hit probability, the small hit probability, the loss probability, and the probability variation probability in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the high probability variation frequency update process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time change frequency | count update process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit completion | finish process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit completion | finish process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 small hits end process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 small hits end process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 big hit completion | finish process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 big hit end process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 big hit completion | finish process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 big hit end process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 small hits end process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 small hits end process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a usual game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during normal map display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general electric operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general electric power residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the end process per common figure. It is a time chart of operation | movement of the 1st special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus in small hit RUSH. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hit system command processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a table which illustrates the presence or absence of the small hit effect and the big hit effect with respect to the hit of the main variation display game or the sub variation display game with respect to a normal game state (left-handed state). In 3rd Embodiment, it is a table which illustrates the presence or absence of the small hit effect and the big hit effect with respect to the hit of the main variation display game or the sub variation display game with respect to the small hit RUSH state (right-handed state). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure starting port 2 switch process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 normal process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the change start information setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. In 3rd Embodiment, it is an example of the screen transition figure (the first half) which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and is a figure which shows the case where a normal small hit and an irregular small hit generate | occur | produce in a normal game state. In 3rd Embodiment, it is an example of the screen transition diagram (latter half) which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and is a figure which shows the case where normal small hit and irregular small hit generate | occur | produce in a normal game state. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the other example 1 with irregular small hits. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the other example 2 with irregular small hits. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the other example 3 (switching effect 1) of irregular small hits. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the other example 4 (switching effect 2) of irregular small hits. It is an example of the screen transition figure (first half) which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series regarding the third embodiment. In the small hit RUSH state (second specific gaming state), the normal small hit and the irregular small hit are It is a figure which shows the case where it generate | occur | produces. The third embodiment is an example of a screen transition diagram (second half) showing the display screen of the display device in time series. In the small hit RUSH state (second specific gaming state), the normal small hit and the irregular small hit are It is a figure which shows the case where it generate | occur | produces. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hit system command process which concerns on the modification of 3rd Embodiment. In the modification of 3rd Embodiment, it is a table which illustrates the presence or absence of the small hit effect and the big hit effect with respect to the hit of the main variation display game or the follow variation display game with respect to a normal game state (left-handed state). In the modification of 3rd Embodiment, it is a table which illustrates the presence or absence of the small hit effect and the big hit effect with respect to the hit of the main variation display game or the follow variation display game with respect to the small hit RUSH state (right-handed state). In the modification of 3rd Embodiment, it is an example of the screen transition diagram (the first half) which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series.

DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions viewed from the player who is playing the game.

[First Embodiment]
[Overall view of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be freely opened and closed through a hinge. The open / close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area in which a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 is visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 7) and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 30. Can do.

Various frame constituent members are disposed on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

On the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15, a decoration device 1 capable of producing a light emission according to the gaming state
8a and 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members arranged inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 8).

Upper speakers 19a are respectively disposed in the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19 b is disposed in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side) is disposed. Protrusion production unit 1
3 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress of the game. Protrusion production unit 13
The illumination member disposed inside the frame also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 8).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that receives an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. .

The production operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the production button 25,
It is provided in the upper center of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in a special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or to execute a notice effect in advance for notifying the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when the variable display game is simply used, in this specification, the special figure variable display game is indicated.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only while the variable display game is being executed, but also when the player operates the effect operation device during non-execution.

Note that the gaming state when the variable display game is executed includes a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. The special game state is, for example, a special game state (short time state) or a special result (
For example, there are a state (probability change state, probability change state), a big hit state (special game state), and a small hit game state (small hit state) with a high probability of occurrence of a big hit.

Here, the probability variation state is one that continues until the next big hit (loop type), one that continues until a predetermined number of fluctuation display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and a predetermined probability falling lottery. There are things that continue until you win (falling lottery type).

In addition, whether or not to generate a probable change state is not determined by the big hit symbol random number, it is possible to always generate a probable change state when a big hit occurs, or provide a winning device equipped with a specific area, etc. The probability variation state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device that is operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27 and a return button 28.
And a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is used when discharging a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which a balance such as a prepaid card is displayed.

The decoration device 22 houses an illumination member such as an LED and performs a light emission effect or the like according to the gaming state, and is provided at the front portion of the upper plate unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 8).

An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launcher (not shown) and a game ball can be stored below the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper plate unit and the like, and below the front frame 12. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is disposed at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The firing speed of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set so as to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. In other words, the ball launcher is a force (speed) for launching a game ball into the game area.
The firing force can be changed in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game ball can be fired in various launch modes with different firing forces. The firing mode includes left-handed (normal hit) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right-handed in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is disposed below the upper plate unit at a predetermined interval with respect to the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 includes a ball punching hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball punching hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation portion 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is a flat game board body 3 serving as a mounting base for various members.
0a is provided. The game board main body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and the game board main body 30a
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front side. The gaming machine 10
A game ball is fired from a ball launcher into a game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

At the approximate center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window portion serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached. An effect display device (variable display device) that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner (variable display) behind the window portion formed in the center case 40.
A display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or a CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and identification information (special symbols) and characters that produce a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, an image based on the progress of the game (a jackpot display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In addition, a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is placed in the center case 40 in the center case 40.
Are provided with a warp passage 40a for guiding them to the inside, and a stage portion 40b on which a game ball that has passed through the warp passage 40a can roll. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the first start winning award port 36 and the second starting winning award port 37, the stage portion 40
The game balls that have rolled on b are easy to win in the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
Constitutes part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 8) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 8).

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of a game ball to the general winning opening 35 is a winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning opening 35.
) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 7).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a first start winning opening (first start winning area, special figure 1 starting opening, starting opening 1) 36 for giving a start condition (starting condition) for the special figure variation display game is provided. Is provided. When left-handed (normally hit), it becomes easier for the game ball to win (enter) the first start winning opening 36. In the game area 32 on the lower right side of the center case 40, a second start winning opening (second start winning area, special figure 2 starting opening, starting opening 2) 37 is provided. When right-handed, the game ball can easily win (enter) the second start winning opening 37. The game ball is the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 3
If the player wins 7, the special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

In the game area 32 below the second start winning opening 37, an attacker type that opens the lower large winning opening by rotating the upper end side to the front side by a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7). A first special variable winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an open / close door 38c is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the state where the special winning opening is closed (blocking state unfavorable for the player) from the closed state (game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure changing display game, A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player by facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the big prize opening. In the lower prize winning opening, a lower prize winning switch 38a (see FIG. 7) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning prize opening.

In addition, the upper left game area 32 of the center case 40 has an upper prize winning solenoid 39b.
(See FIG. 7), a second special variable prize winning device 39 (special electric accessory) having an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that opens the upper prize winning opening by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts forward is provided. ing. Similarly to the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39 is in a state in which the big winning opening is closed according to the result of the special figure changing display game (blocked state unfavorable for the player).
Is converted to an open state (a game state advantageous to the player), and a game ball is easily allowed to flow into the upper prize winning opening, thereby giving a predetermined game value (award ball) to the player. ing. In the upper prize opening, an upper prize opening switch 39a (see FIG. 7) (two in this embodiment) is provided as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special prize opening.

General winning port 35, first starting winning port 36, second starting winning port 37, first special variable winning device 3
When a game ball wins a prize at the lower 8 winning prize opening and the upper winning prize opening of the second special variable prize winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 7) receives a number of prizes according to the type of winning prize winning mouth. The ball is discharged from the dispensing device to the upper plate 21. The game area 32 below the first special variable winning device 38 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

In addition, in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a outside the game area 32, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game (a special figure 1 game), a special figure 2 a variable display game (a special figure 2). game)
) Is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units D1 to D20 that display information such as the current gaming state (see FIG. 3).

FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the collective display device 50. The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display unit 51 for a variation display game configured by a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like.
(Special figure 1 indicator) (lamp D1) and 2nd special figure fluctuation display part 52 (special figure 2 indicator) (lamp D2). Further, the collective display device 50 includes a round display section 53 (lamps D3-D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of opening / closing of the special variable prize-winning devices 38, 39) and the occurrence of a small hit, and a special figure 1 variable display. Memory display unit 54 for notifying the number of games started (pending) stored (holding)
Special figure 1 hold indicator) (lamps D11-D14).

Further, the collective display device 50 has a first game state display unit 55 (first game state display, probability state display unit) (lamp D15-) for displaying that the winning probability state is a high probability state.
D18), a second gaming state display unit 56 (second gaming state indicator) that notifies that it is right-handed (when it should be right-handed) when a big or small hit occurs, (lamps D8-D10) Is provided. In addition, the collective display device 50 corresponds to a later-described modified example, and a third game state display unit 57 (third display) indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is suspended.
It may have a game status indicator, an interrupt status indicator (lamps D19, D20).

FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating lighting states of various display units 53-57 (lamps D3-D20) constituting the collective display device 50. The collective display device 50 displays the state of gaming machines corresponding to the lighting modes of the various display units 53-57. The round display part 53 (lamps D3-D7) is lit according to the number of rounds, and the memory display part 54 (lamps D11-D14) is lit according to the number of holds (starting memory number). The first gaming state display unit 55 (lamps D15 to D18) is turned on in a high probability state, is turned off in a low probability state, and the second gaming state display unit 56 (lamps D8 to D10) is turned on when right-handed. Turns off when left-handed (normally fired).

Next, the game flow in the gaming machine 10 and details of the special figure variation display game will be described.
In the present embodiment, the usual figure start gate is not provided, and the so-called universal figure change display game is not executed. The second start winning opening 37 is not provided with a movable member that opens and closes the second start winning opening 37.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills and the like arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the general prize opening 3
5. Win in the first start winning port 36, the second start winning port 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or to the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 It flows in and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the type of the winning winning port is set. A corresponding number of prize balls are discharged to the upper plate 21 via the payout device.

As a basic way of gaming, in the normal gaming state, the player left strikes and the game ball is awarded to the first start winning opening 36 to start the special figure 1 variable display game. When this occurs, the player switches to the right hand and aims at the second start winning opening 37 or the big winning opening. The display device 41 can display an instruction for instructing whether the player should make a left strike or a right strike. If the player does not follow the instruction, the display device 41 or the speaker 19a is displayed.
19b, an error can be notified.

The winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 and the winning to the second start winning opening 37 are detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 7) and the start opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 7). The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored with a predetermined upper limit number (4 in this embodiment) as the limit, and the second start winning opening The game ball won in 37 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (1 in this embodiment).

When detecting the starting winning ball of the special figure variation display game, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure holding storage area (part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as a special figure start winning memory (special figure start memory) for each predetermined number of times (for example, in the special figure 1 variable display game, the maximum value is maximum). Memorize up to 4 times). The number stored in the special figure 1 start winning memory (the special figure 1 starting memory) is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be simultaneously executed (running) independently of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Special figure 2 start winnings during display game execution, big hit, etc. are disabled (detection of start port 2 switch 37a is disabled). Accordingly, the special figure 2 start winning memory (special figure 2 starting memory) is not substantially accumulated, and the special figure 2 variation display game starts as soon as the special figure 2 start winning memory is generated. That is, when the special figure 2 variable display game is not played at the timing when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 37, the fluctuation start condition (start condition) of the special figure 2 variable display game
Is established. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 start winning memory number is not displayed on the collective display device 50 or the display device 41. In addition, the structure which displays the special figure 2 start winning memory | storage number on the collective display apparatus 50 or the display apparatus 41 is also possible.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) with the special figure 1 display 51 on the basis of the winning to the first starting prize opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning to the second start winning opening 37 or the second start memory. To do.

The special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are identified in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 (special symbol 1 (special symbol 1), special symbol 2 (special symbol 2)). This is performed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after variably displaying.

In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed independently of each other at the same time (both). If it occurs (a special result or a specific result is derived and displayed in a stopped state), the other special figure variation display game that is being executed is forcibly stopped at the disengaged result.

When a game ball wins the second start winning opening 37 by right-handing in the normal gaming state,
Special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts to fluctuate, but basically fluctuates for a long time (long fluctuation, for example 10 minutes)
Therefore, the player is forced to stop by the big hit or the small hit generated in the special figure 1 variable display game during this period.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a lighting mode of a 7 segment type display (lamp D1) constituting the special figure 1 display 51. As shown in FIG. The special figure 1 variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (here, the central segment and the point portion) is repeatedly turned on and off on the special figure 1 display 51. In the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the outage result stop display (outage symbol, outlier display) is a display in which the center segment and the dot portion are lit. Special Figure 1 Stop display of jackpot result of variable display game (
The jackpot symbol, jackpot display) can have a plurality of displays (symbols) corresponding to the number of rounds (R) of the jackpot and the gaming state (normal state or probability change state) after the jackpot. There are several types of stop display (small hit symbol, small hit display) for the special game 1 variation display game, but the same one type of open pattern (open time, etc.) for the big prize opening due to the small hit ( (Special figure 1 small hit) only.

In this embodiment, for all types of jackpots, the probability variation state is a predetermined number of times after the jackpot ends (
This is continued until the variable display game (for example 50 times) is executed. That is, the gaming machine is an ST (special time) machine, and the jackpot symbol is only the probability variation symbol.

6A and 6B show a 7-segment type display (lamp D1) constituting the special figure 2 display 52. FIG.
It is a figure which shows the lighting aspect of (). The special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed by a fluctuation display in which the identification information (here, the central segment and the point portion) is repeatedly turned on and off on the special figure 2 display 52. Special figure 2 The display of stoppage of the result of fluctuation display game (out of symbol, out of display)
The center segment is lit. Special figure 2 The display of the big hit results of the variable display game (big hit symbol, big hit display) is the number of rounds (R) of the big hit and the game state (
There can be a plurality of displays (symbols) corresponding to the normal state or the probability variation state. There are multiple types of stop display (small hit symbol, small hit display) of the small hit result of the special figure 2 variable display game,
There are 3 types of opening patterns (opening time, etc.) for the big prize opening by small hits (Special Figure 2
). In addition, the special winning holes 1, 2, and 3 for special figure 2 may differ in the winning prize opening (the upper winning prize opening or the lower winning prize opening). Any one opens in a predetermined opening pattern.

In addition, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure fluctuation display game for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) corresponding to each special figure fluctuation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, for example, a decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of numbers or the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, scrolling display is started, symbols changing after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure changing display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 displays various effects such as the appearance of characters in order to improve interest.

When a game ball is won at the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), the special figure variation display game As a result of the above, a special result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and a big hit state (special game state) is obtained. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are arranged).

In this case, the first special variable winning device 38 and / or the second special variable winning device 39 are energized to the lower large winning port solenoid (38b) and / or the upper large winning port solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 7). The special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, several seconds or several tens of seconds). That is, the big prize opening provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 is opened widely for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls wins, during which the player opens many game balls. The privilege that it can be acquired is given.

When a game ball is won at the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number at the time of winning detection is a small hit value), a special figure change display As a result of the game, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display symbols, and a small hit state is set. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 is the small hit result mode. In this embodiment, a big hit random number value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value).
Is different from the big hit value (big hit judgment value).

In this case, the first special variable prize-winning device 38 and / or the second special variable prize-winning device 39 is energized to the lower big prize winning solenoid 38b and / or the upper big prize winning solenoid 39b (see FIG. 7). Is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time (for example, 2 seconds or less).

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

The big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is generated. Variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38 and / or second
This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the special variable winning device 39) is set. That the condition device does not operate means that the specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of

Specifically, in the case of a big win, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

Note that the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are configured as separate displays, and each special figure variation display game may have an execution state (executed state) at the same time. If a big win or a small win occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (the special result or the specific result is derived and displayed in a stopped state), the other special figure fluctuation display game that is being executed Stop.

As for the decorative special figure fluctuation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may be executed in different display devices or in different display areas, or the same display. You may make it perform in an apparatus or a display area. In addition, the decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may both have the execution state (executed state) at the same time. When a big hit or a small hit occurs (a special result or a specific result is derived and displayed in a stopped state), the other decoration special figure variation display game that is being executed is forcibly stopped at the result of the loss.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning port 37, the winning port switch 35a, the count switch (38a, 39a) is a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Has been. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. A microswitch having a typical contact can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 7 is a block diagram of the game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 is a gaming control device 10
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of games, and has a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111.
A U unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, a CPU unit 110, a data bus 140 connecting the input unit 120 and the output unit 130, and the like.

The CPU unit 110 is a game microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111 and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that includes an oscillator such as a crystal resonator and generates a clock for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and the like. , Gaming microcomputer 11
1 has a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a control signal such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be exchanged when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 43 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is a game microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the gaming microcomputer 1
11 forcibly initializes the information stored in the RAM 111c in the RAM 11 and the RAM in the payout control apparatus 200. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and read / write RA at any time
M (random access memory) 111c is provided.

The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area for the CPU 111a and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as ROM 111b or RAM 11
As 1c, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

In addition, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. A gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player when it becomes a special result mode (special gaming state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display in all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information It is also possible to set the reach state (except for the special result mode) to the reach state and display the remaining one variable display area in a variable manner from the reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach productions, and there is a possibility that a special result mode is derived (differing expected value). As a system of reach production, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach). Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in a variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is likely to be a big hit compared to the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the game machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a jackpot for determining the jackpot symbol. A random number generation circuit for generating a random number, a fluctuation pattern random number for determining a fluctuation pattern in a special figure fluctuation display game (including execution time of a fluctuation display game in a fluctuation display without various reach and reach) And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. .

In addition, the CPU 111a performs the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
One of the variation pattern tables is acquired from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, and the starting memory number. Based on the above, one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. Here, the CPU 11
When executing a special figure fluctuation display game, 1a serves as fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to thereby win a prize ball. Control to pay out.
Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout unit 91 to drive the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the loan request signal from the card unit 600 to pay out the loaned money.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start port 1 switch 36 a in the first start prize port 36, and a second start prize port 37. Starting port 2 switch 37a, winning port switch 35a, lower special winning port switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, upper upper winning port switch 3 of the second special variable winning device 39
The high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7
An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that receives a negative logic signal such as V and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal is provided.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F1
21, detection signals from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower large winning port switch 38a, and the upper large winning port switch 39a are input to the third input port 124.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Also, the second input port 123 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. A signal is input from the front frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12, and the like. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the second input port 123.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36 a and the start port 2 switch 37 a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

The data held in the third input port 124 is stored in the enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read out by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

Also, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball cut switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. The data switch 1 receives the touch switch signal based on the overflow switch signal and the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24.
A first input port 122 is provided to supply to the gaming microcomputer 111 via 40.
The frame radio wave fraud signal is a signal that is output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12, and the payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command. Signal. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and are then connected to the gaming microcomputer 1 via the data bus 140.
11 is taken in. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the output unit 13.
0 is supplied to each port. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows.

Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is sent from the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124 are not supplied. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced / sold product) installed in the game store. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. Yes. The port on the relay board 70 is connected to the gaming microcomputer 11.
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the trial test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (lower large prize opening solenoid) 38b that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the first special variation winning apparatus 38, and a solenoid (upper large prize opening) that opens the second special variable winning apparatus 39. A second output port 134 for outputting opening / closing data of the solenoid 39b is provided.

In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. ON / OFF of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 for outputting off-data is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 receives information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information from the external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for output to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the lower large winning port solenoid 38b and the upper large winning port solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal (driving). Circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b for outputting an ON / OFF drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current draw side of 50, and a fourth driver that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71. A driver 138d is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. In addition, the collective display device 50
DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b for driving the segment line. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

A dynamic driving method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V, and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so as to be lit. 4th which outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal 71
The driver 138d is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250. Photocoupler 13
9 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG.
These are block diagrams of the production control system of the gaming machine 10.

The production control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
And a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing for video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A sound source LSI 314 is provided for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a program executed by the CPU (production control program).
Program ROM 321 composed of PROM (Programmable Read Only Memory) storing various data, RAM 322 providing work area, FeRAM 323 capable of retaining stored contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure, current date and time (year / month / day and day of the week) RTC (real-time clock) 338 which is a clocking means for generating information indicating the time) is connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, or the sound source LSI 314.
Processing such as instruction of playback sound, lighting of decoration lamp, drive control of motor and solenoid, management of production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS for giving data transmission timing is input. VDP 312
To the main control microcomputer 311, a wait time for notifying the waiting state of the reception of commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT <b> 0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I / F3
31. The special figure holding number command, the decorative special figure command, the change command, the stop information command, and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are received as production control command signals (production commands). . The gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 is DC5
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40) a board effect device 44 (for example, a display device 41)
A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25 b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function for detecting the on / off state of the production effect switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like, and a detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, or a volume adjustment switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 includes the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
In order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled thereby, DC 32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12V for driving a motor or LED, DC5 that is the power supply voltage of the command I / F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15 V voltage for driving a motor, LED, and speaker.

Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. DC-
The DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. The VDP 312 (VDRESET signal) and the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
Are supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state where N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.

Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 1 switch 36a provided in the first start winning port 36, the start winning (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting memory, the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game 1 is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b.
Judgment of hitting of the variable display game

In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the second start winning port 37, and based on the start memory, the big hit judgment disturbance of the special figure 2 variable display game is stored. A numerical value is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is missed.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a special figure variation display game for stopping and displaying is displayed. In other words, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on winning in the start winning area (first start winning opening 36, second start winning opening 37) of the game balls flowing down the game area 32. Make a means.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed.
That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, and also displays the special game state (big hit) State). In the process of generating a special game state, C
For example, the PU 111a opens the open / close door 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38 by the big prize opening solenoid 38b or opens the movable member 39c of the second special variable prize winning device 39 by the big prize opening solenoid 39b to enter the big prize opening. The control which enables inflow of the game ball of is performed.

Whether a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening, or whether a predetermined openable time (for example, about 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening Control (cycle game) where one round of opening the grand prize opening is achieved until any of the conditions is achieved, and this is repeated (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16, 8, 4, or 2). )I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the high probability state, the probability that a hit result (a big hit result in this embodiment) in the special figure variation display game is a normal probability state (
It is a high state compared to a low probability state. Further, based on the result mode of either the special figure fluctuation display game (first special figure fluctuation display game) or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game), Even if it becomes, both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game will be in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the short time state, control is performed so that the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game is shortened. In the present embodiment, the high-probability state and the short-time state are configured to occur at the same time, but it is also possible to generate each independently and generate only one of them.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 is mainly performed in the main processing shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B and at a predetermined time period (4 msec (milliseconds in this embodiment)).
2 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. That is, the game control program corresponding to the control process of the game microcomputer 111 is the main program (calling routine) corresponding to the main process.
And an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing.

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. 9A and 9B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the game control apparatus 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control apparatus 100, the step code (number) is represented as “A ***” or “S ***”.

As shown in FIG. 9A, when starting the main process, the game control apparatus 100 first executes a process for prohibiting interruption (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area in which the value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power-on delay timer (A1007).
By setting a predetermined initial value in the power-on delay timer, slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 20) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means.
0 and the stand-by time for waiting until the program of the production control device 300 starts normally (
For example, 3 seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122,
By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the waiting time, the initialization switch 11
2 operations can be detected reliably. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

When the power-on delay timer is set (A1007), the game control apparatus 100 executes the time measurement of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads and checks the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (
(For example, twice) is set (A1008), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1).
009).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y
]), It is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008 (A1010). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the power failure monitoring signal in step A1009 is on.

In addition, when the game control device 100 determines that the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not ON (the result of A1009 is “
N "), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1011), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

Further, the game control device 100 determines that the timer value is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”).
) In other words, when the standby time is completed, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (no output) (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch is turned on from the state of the first input port 122 read in advance (A1016).

When the initialization switch is off (the result of A1016 is “
N "), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (A1017). If normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), R
It is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the WM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (A1018).

Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 executes a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (A1019). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum when the power is turned off (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is “
Y "), the process proceeds to the process of step A1021 in FIG. 9B, and the process in the case of normal recovery (recovery) from the power failure is executed.

In addition, when the initialization switch is ON (the result of A1016 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (A1).
If the result of 017 is “N” or the result of A1018 is “N”) and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1023 in FIG. 9B and is initialized. Execute the process. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

The game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A10).
21). The areas to be initialized are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area (payout busy signal flag area) that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to accept a command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is changed. It is in an indefinite state indicating that it has not been confirmed.

Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1022), and the process of step A1028 is executed. The command at the time of power failure recovery includes a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, a decoration special figure 1 holding number command indicating the number of holdings of the special figure 1, a probability information command indicating the probability state, a screen specifying command, and the like. .
The screen designation command is a command for designating the display contents of the display device 41. For example, when both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being processed at all times (when neither fluctuation nor hit operation is being performed). Is a command for waiting for a demo, and a recovery screen command otherwise.

In addition, the command at the time of power failure recovery includes a special map 1 as shown in a modified example of FIGS.
When the variable display game or special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (when there is a special figure game interruption flag backed up in the RWM), the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended or special figure. Suspended command indicating that the 2-variable display game is suspended (suspended command)
May be included.

On the other hand, when the processing of step A1023 is executed after the execution of steps A1016, A1017, A1018, and A1020, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibited area to access permission (A1023). Further, all RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1024), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1025).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1026). The area to be initialized is an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Furthermore, the game control device 100 transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1027), and executes the process of step A1028. Commands at the time of RAM initialization include a model designation command, a decorative special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command, and the like. By the RAM initialization command,
The effect control device 300 displays a customer waiting demonstration on the screen of the display device 41, and notifies the RAM initialization by the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 and the upper speakers 19a and 19b (for example, for 30 seconds).

In addition, the command at the time of power failure restoration transmitted by the process of step A1022 and step A1
The command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of 027 further includes an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time reduction number information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time reduction state.

The gaming control device 100 is a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
) The circuit is activated (A1028). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and the CPU 11 based on the divided signal.
A timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to 1a and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a random number update trigger to be supplied to the random number generation circuit are provided.

After executing the CTC activation process of step A1028, the game control apparatus 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1029). Specifically, a predetermined register (CTC) in the random number generation circuit.
The setting of the code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in the update permission register) is C
Performed by PU 111a. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines

In the present embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random numbers according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random numbers can be broken and the confidentiality of the random numbers can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers that determine the big hit symbol (big hit symbol) The initial value (start value) of random number 1, jackpot symbol random number 2)) is saved in a predetermined area of RWM (A1030), and interrupt is permitted (A1031). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, and this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1032). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. It is a “low speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle.

In addition, the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number employ a so-called “initial value changing method” in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes round. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or 1,
It may be a random update in which all values in the range appear apart without overlapping until one round is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step A 1032, the game control device 100 executes the power supply device 40.
A power failure monitoring signal input from 0 is read through the port and the data bus and the number of times of checking is set (A1033), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A10).
34). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1034 is “N”), step A
The process returns to the initial value random number update process of 1032. That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (A1032) (A1031), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is initialized. It is possible to prevent the interruption process from being pressed by waiting in the value random number update process.

Note that the initial value random number update process in step A 1032 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. When such a method is adopted, both of the initial value random number update processes are performed. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A 1034 is “Y”), the game control device 10
0 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in the processing of step A1033 (A1035). If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (the result of A1035 is “N”), the process returns to step A1034 to determine whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on.

In addition, the game control device 100 interrupts once when the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks (the result of A1035 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. Is prohibited (A1036), and off data is output to all output ports (A103).
7).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection region check data 1 in the power failure inspection region 1 (A1038), and saves the power failure inspection region check data 2 in the power failure inspection region 2 (
A1039). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is turned off is executed (A1040), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1041).
). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1042), and the system waits until the gaming machine is powered off.

In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

The main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111c capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111c based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, The operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

In addition, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the checksum calculation process. The checksum calculation process is executed in steps A1019 and A1040 of the main process shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B.

First, the game control apparatus 100 sets the start address of the RWM as the start value of the calculated address (A1101). Then, the number of repetitions is set (A1102), and “0” is set as a calculated value (A1103). The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address as a new calculated value (A1104), updates the calculated address by +1 (A1105), and sets the number of repetitions to -1.
Update (A1106). Then, it is determined whether the checksum calculation is completed (A
1107).

If the checksum calculation has not ended (the result of A1107 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 repeats the processing from step A1104 to step A1107. When the checksum calculation is completed (the result of A1107 is “Y”), the checksum calculation process is terminated.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of initial value random number update processing. The initial value random number update process is executed in step A1032 of the main process shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B.

The game control device 100 updates the jackpot symbol initial value random number by one (A1201). Then, the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1202), and the initial value random number update process is terminated.

Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is the random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” is the random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit symbol stop symbol It is.

As described above, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM head address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the register used in the main process. When timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs from various sensors and switches, captures signals,
That is, an input process for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). further,
Based on the output data set in various processes, the solenoid (large prize opening solenoid 38b,
39b) and the like, and output processing for performing drive control of the actuator is executed (A130).
4). If a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permitted state. .

Next, the game control device 100 executes payout command transmission processing for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processing to the payout control device 200 (A1305), and further, random number update processing 1 (A1306), random number update Process 2 (A1307) is executed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower large winning port switch 38a, and the upper large winning port switch 39a, and error monitoring. A winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed (such as whether the front frame or the glass frame is open) (A1308).

Further, the game control device 100 includes a start port 1 switch 36a and a start port 2 switch 37a.
The start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning at the start port is executed (A1309). Subsequently, a special figure 1 game process for performing a process related to the special figure 1 variable display game is executed (A1310).
Next, a special figure 2 game process for performing a process related to the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (A1).
311). Details of the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process are shown in FIGS. 32 and 33.
Will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the gaming machine 10 and executes a segment LED editing process for driving a segment LED that displays special information variation game and various information related to the game to display desired contents. (A1312). Details of the segment LED editing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1313). Further, radio wave fraud monitoring processing (board radio wave fraud monitoring processing) for checking whether there is any abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board is executed (A1314). Details of the magnet fraud monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. The details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process are shown in FIG.
Will be described later.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1315). Details of the external information editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that, when the timer interrupt process returns, the interrupt disabled state and the register bank specification are automatically restored, but depending on the CPU used, the interrupt is permitted after the external information editing process. Or a process of returning the register bank designation to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (A1303) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure of input processing.

First, the game control device 100 reads the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 (A1401). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (A1402).

Next, the game control device 100 saves (stores) the read state of the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (A1403). Subsequently, after preparing the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (A14
04), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (A1405). continue,
Unused bit data is prepared (A1406), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1407). Then, a switch reading process is executed (A1408). Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM (A
1409), the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (A
1410). Further, unused bit data is prepared (A1411), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1412). Further, switch read processing is executed thereafter (A14
13) The input process is terminated.

[Switch read processing]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (A1408, A1413) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switch reading process.

First, the game control device 100 reads the state of the signal taken into the target input port (A1501). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1502), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1503), and saved in the port input state 1 of the target switch control area ( (A1504). Thereafter, the process waits until a delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading elapses (A1505).

When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, the game control device 100 performs the second reading of the state of the signal captured in the target input port (A1506). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (A1507), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1508), and saved in the port input state 2 of the target switch control area ( (A1509). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same state bit is 1 and the different bit is 0 in the first and second reads (A1510), and the determinate bit pattern and port input state 2 are ANDed to confirm this time Bits are set (A1511).

Next, the game control device 100 creates an undetermined bit pattern in which the same status bit is 0 and the different bit is 1 in the first and second readings (A1512), and the undetermined bit pattern and the previous interrupt The logical product with the definite state is calculated and used as the previous hold bit (A1513). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed.

Then, the game control device 100 combines the current confirmed bit and the previous held bit and saves it as the current confirmed state (A1514). Further, an exclusive OR of the previous state and the final state is taken and saved as a rising edge (A1515). Thereafter, the switch reading process ends.

If the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt process, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method of determining whether or not it has been done, but in such a case, if the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that it cannot be determined correctly. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problem by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (A1304) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the output process.

The game control device 100 first outputs (resets) off-data to the port 135 (see FIG. 7) that outputs the segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601).
Next, the solenoid output port 13 for outputting the data of the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b.
4 is synthesized and output (A1602).

Then, the game control apparatus 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). The acquired data and external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the digit output / external information output port 136 (A1606). After that, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (A
1607), the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (A160).
8).

Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 loads and synthesizes data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), and further synthesizes the synthesized data with the output data for permission to fire (A161).
0), and finally the synthesized data is output to the external information / firing permission signal output port 137 (
A1611). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1612). Thereafter, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1613).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test fire test apparatus, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The synthesized data is output (A1614). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1615
). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1616), the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (A1305) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of payout command transmission processing.

The game control device 100 first checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111c of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By comparing these two signals,
It is possible to monitor unauthorized payments.

Each of these winning number counter areas is classified by the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, 2 winning balls, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 13 winning balls, 14 winning balls). ) Is provided with a winning number counter area, and the number of counts in the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The win counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the win counter area 2 so that more win data can be stored.
This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination, and more unsent This is because data may be accumulated.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 in step A1701, the game control apparatus 100 receives a winning that is a check target among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls. It is determined whether there is a count number other than “0” in the number counter area.

When there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2 (A170)
The result of 1 is “N”), and the address of the winning counter area 2 to be checked is updated (
A1702). Further, it is determined whether or not the check of the count numbers in all the winning number counter areas has been completed (A1703).

When all the checks are completed (the result of A1703 is “
Y "), the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1703 is “N”), the process returns to step A1701, and the processes from step A1701 to step A1703 are repeated.

In addition, the game control device 100 determines that there is a count number (the result of A1701 is “Y”).
), The count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (A1704), and the payout number corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 2 is acquired (A1705). Then, the value in the prize ball remaining area and the number of payouts are added (A1706), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining area as a new prize ball remaining number (A1707). Note that as the value of the remaining prize ball area before the processing of step A1707, a fraction that has not reached a predetermined number as a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 subtracts 10 from the addition result (A1708), and determines whether or not the subtraction result is 0 or more (A1709). If it is not greater than 0 (A1709)
Is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, if it is 0 or more (the result of A1709 is “Y”), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (A17).
10) The subtraction result is saved in the remaining number of winning balls area (A1711), and further, in step A170
Return to the process of 8.

Through the above processing, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates −1 (A171).
2) It is determined whether or not the payout command transmission timer has reached 0 (A1713). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (the result of A1713 is “N”), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (the result of A1713 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal status (flag) is busy (busy state flag) (A1714).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start the payout control immediately. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is in the on state (
Busy state). That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal status (flag) is determined based on the state of the payout busy signal.
Is information that sets whether or not payout control can be started immediately, idle state in which payout control can be started immediately, busy state in which payout control cannot be started immediately, and indefinite state in which the state is indefinite Is set.

When the payout busy signal status is busy, the game control apparatus 100 (A1
If the result of 714 is “Y”), the payout command transmission process is terminated. When not busy, the idle state and the undefined state are included. Thus, the dispensing control device 2
If 00 cannot immediately start payout control and does not send a payout command, it prevents unnecessary processing from being performed by avoiding subsequent processing related to sending out the payout command, thereby reducing the control burden. I try to reduce it.

The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal status area in the process at power-on. This indeterminate state means that an idle state or a busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be executed. To eliminate. That is, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that a state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

When the payout busy signal status is not busy, the game control apparatus 100 (A1
If the result of 714 is “N”), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (A1715). In the process of checking whether the winning number counter area 1 has a count, among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, a count number other than “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. It is determined whether or not there is.

And the game control apparatus 100 (when the result of A1715 is "N" when there is no count number.
”), The address of the winning counter area 1 to be checked is updated (A1716), and it is determined whether or not the checking of the counting numbers of all winning counter areas has been completed (A17).
17). If all checks are completed (the result of A1717 is “Y”), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if all checks have not been completed (A171
7 is “N”), the process returns to step A1715, and steps A1715 to A17 are performed.
Repeat the process up to 17.

In addition, the game control device 100 determines that there is a count number (the result of A1715 is “Y”).
), The count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (A1718), and a payout command corresponding to the target winning number counter area is acquired (A1719). Then, the payout command (payout number command) is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1720), an initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (A1721), and then the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control apparatus 100 can start the payout control with a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) can start payout control. In this case, a prize ball command transmission means for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means is provided.

As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, since conventional gaming machines require a function for backup,
There was a problem that led to an increase in cost. According to this embodiment, the payout control device 200.
Therefore, accurate payout control can be realized without providing a backup function.

Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

From the above, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and the winning areas provided in the gaming area 32 (the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, the general winning port 35, the first special variable winning device 38). , Based on the game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to the second special variable prize winning device 39), based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means,
A payout control means (payout control device 200) for paying out game balls, and the game control means indicates whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. A state that indicates that a payout control can be started from the payout control means when a power failure occurs and recovery from the power failure is performed based on a signal (busy signal) based on a signal (busy signal). Even if the signal is output, the award ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means is continuously output over a predetermined period. Correspondingly, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

In addition, the game area 32 has different winning areas (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning apparatus 38, second special variable winning apparatus 39). A plurality of game control means (game control device 100) is provided for each prize ball number, and a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls is transmitted. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200). Before the identification of whether or not there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. I will do it.

In addition, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and a predetermined winning area (first start winning opening 36, second
Start winning port 37, general winning port 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 3
9) Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball to 9)
) And payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of game balls based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means is output from the payout control means. Prize ball command transmission means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started (
The game control device 100) and external information for outputting to the outside of the gaming machine a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information relating to the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning the game balls in a predetermined prize area Output means (game control device 100), and the external information output means outputs a prize ball signal regardless of whether or not the status signal output from the payout control means can start payout control by the payout control means. The output is performed.

In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) is a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, second start winning port 37, general winning port 35). The first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39) generate a prize ball command as a unit, and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The prize ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) is configured to transmit the prize ball command to the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200). Is memorable Updates are made when a game ball is won in a predetermined winning area, and the number of award ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored by updating the game ball in response to the transmission of a prize ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of game balls to a predetermined winning area, and outputs a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is capable of storing information of the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and is updated when a game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, By updating in accordance with the accumulation process of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated can be stored.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number update process 1. The random number update process 1 is executed in step A1306 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Random number update process 1
This is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1801).

When the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting, the game control device 100 (A1801)
The result of step A1804 and subsequent steps is executed. On the other hand, when the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is “Y”), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (A1802). Then, the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1803).

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1804). If the small hit design random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (A
When the result of 1804 is “N”), the random number update processing 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting, the game control device 100 (A1
The result of 804 is “Y”), and the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (A18).
05). Then, the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A18).
06), the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step A1307 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Random number update process 2
This is a process of updating a fluctuation pattern random number for determining a fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are a 1-byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 2, 3) and a 2-byte random number (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers.
Both are subject to update, and each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. further,
When the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (reach fluctuation mode determining random number) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

First, the game control device 100 updates a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which random number to be updated from among a plurality of random numbers to be updated (A1).
901). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (A1902). Then, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (A1903). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads the value of the M1 counter to which a random value is set (A1904).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter, and masks the value of the M1 counter (A1905). Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (A1906). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “Y”), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as the addition value ( Hereinafter, this is referred to as “masked value”) and set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (A1907), and the process proceeds to step A1909.

In addition, when the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the upper 1 byte as “0” as the addition value and sets the lower 1 byte. The mask update value is set (A1908), and the process proceeds to step A1909. The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is to prevent the masked value from being “0” and to prevent the value from changing by adding “0”.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (A1).
909). If it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is “Y”), the value of the random number area to be updated (2 bytes) is set (A1910), and the process proceeds to step A1912. On the other hand, when the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is “N”)
Then, “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, the value (1 byte) of the random number area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random value (A1911), and the process proceeds to step A1912.

The game control apparatus 100 sets a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in the process of step A1907 or A1908 to the random number value as a new random value, and whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in the process of A1903. It is determined whether or not (A1913).

Then, the game control device 100 (when the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (
The result of A1913 is “N”), and a new random number value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (A1915). When the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A1913 is “Y”), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as a new new random value (A1914). A random number value is saved in a random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (A1915).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (
A1916). If it is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is “N”), the random number update processing 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is “Y
”), A new random number value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number (A1917), and the random number update process 2 is terminated.

In this way, the CPU 111a updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Therefore, the CPU 111a
A variation pattern for determining a variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the start area of the start winning opening 36 or the second start winning opening 37 It serves as a random number update means for updating random numbers.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a winning mouth switch / status monitoring process. The prize opening switch / status monitoring process is performed in step A130 in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.
8 is executed.

First, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper prize winning switch 39a (two pieces) in the upper prize winning opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) (A2001). Then, an illegal & winning monitoring process is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open (A2002). Details of the fraud & prize winning monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the fraud monitoring table, the monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the illegal winning number area, the illegal winning error notification command, the illegal Information of a winning number upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determination), a winning mouth monitoring table, and notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. The winning opening monitoring table defines information on the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the winning counter area 1 address, and the winning counter area 2 address. These fraud monitoring tables and winning opening monitoring tables are prepared according to the respective switches to be monitored.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower major prize opening switch 38a in the lower major prize opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) (A2003). And
The illegal & winning monitoring process for monitoring the illegal winning and detecting the normal winning is executed (A2
004).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of winning opening switches (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that can always win (A2005). ), A winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number is executed (A2006).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process (A2007).
In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the special figure 2 fluctuation number) is counted as the abnormal fluctuation number in the normal gaming state (at a low probability), and the abnormal fluctuation number is a predetermined value ( For example, when reaching 5), the effect control device 300 is caused to execute error notification. Details of the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 updates a state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals whose state should be monitored and signals to be monitored this time (A2008). ). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2009). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2010).
. Details of the gaming machine state check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output by the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like (switch abnormality) 1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shoot ball break error) based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. Status scan counter value is 2
Is set to monitor the state (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state based on the payout abnormality status signal (payout error) is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2011). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2012).

By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state (glass frame open error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch. When the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (main body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave improper signal (frame radio wave fraud) is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2013). If the error scan counter value is not 0 (A2013)
Is “N”), the winning a prize mouth switch / status monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next.

In addition, the game control apparatus 100 determines that the error scan counter value is 0 (A2
The result of 013 is “Y”), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (A2014), and a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2015).
.

By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter value is 0, a state based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (a payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2016). ), The winning prize switch / status monitoring process is terminated. Details of the payout busy signal check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Note that the processing from steps A2014 to A2016 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed once every four timer interrupts. . That is, if a timer interrupt is made every 4 ms, 1
Processing from A2014 to A2016 is performed every 6 ms.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. The fraud & prize winning monitoring process is performed in steps A2002 and A2 in the prize opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG.
It is executed at 004.

The fraud & prize winning monitoring process is performed by the lower special prize opening switch 38a of the first special variable prize winning device 38, the second
This is a process performed for the upper prize winning port switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39. As for the big prize opening (special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39), since it is easy to perform fraud in which the opening and closing member is forcibly opened and a game ball is inserted to pay out the prize ball, fraud is monitored in addition to detection of the prize. .

First, the game control device 100 checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch to be monitored for error (A2101), and determines whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (A2102).
The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the lower large winning port switch 38a. Alternatively, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the upper large winning port switch 39a.

When the gaming control device 100 is in the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “
Y "), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (A2103). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (the result of A2103 is “N”), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2103 is “Y”), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (A2104), and the illegal winning number after addition is determined to be the fraudulent occurrence of the monitoring target. It is determined whether or not the number is more than 5 (for example, 5) (A2105).

The reason why the number of judgments is five is that, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent a case where a prize is won or a signal is noisy and not to be judged as illegal, and an error is not easily determined even though it is not illegal.

When the game control apparatus 100 does not exceed the determined number (the result of A2105 is “
N "), a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (A2110). Also,
If the number is more than the determination number (the result of A2105 is “Y”), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determination (A2106), and the initial value (eg, 60000 ms) is set in the target fraud winning notification timer area.
) Is saved (A2107).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a target fraud generation command (A2108), and further prepares a fraud winning generation flag as a fraud flag (A2109). Then, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (A2120).

On the other hand, if the gaming control device 100 is not in the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “N
”), A winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (A2110), and a winning number counter updating process for setting a winning ball is executed (A2111). Details of the winning number counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, the game control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (A2112).
Then, it is determined whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (result of A2113 is “N”), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when update of the notification timer is permitted (result of A2113 is “Y”), if the target notification timer is not 0, −1 is updated (A2114). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

The notification timer is updated by checking that the prize winning switch for error monitoring is one of the upper prize winning switch 3
If it is 9a, it is permitted, and if the prize port switch subject to error monitoring is the other upper prize port switch 39a, it is not permitted. As a result, the notification timer is updated twice with respect to the fraud notification about the second special variable winning device 39, and a prescribed time (for example, 6
It is prevented that the time is up in half of (0000 ms). Note that when the prize monitor switch subject to error monitoring is the lower large prize opening switch 38a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (A211).
5) If the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value of the notification timer is 0 (
When the result of A2115 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or when the time has already expired, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (A2116), and an illegal win cancel flag is prepared as an fraud flag (A2117). And it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

The game control device 100 is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “Y”), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize winning monitoring process. Clears the target number of illegal prizes (A2119).

In addition, the game control device 100 does not execute the processing of step A2119 or when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “N”), that is, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process before the previous time. When the value of the notification timer becomes 0, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (A2120).

When the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. Also,
When the prepared illegal flag and the value of the target illegal flag area do not match (result of A2120 is “N”), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (A2121),
Command setting processing is executed (A2122). Thereafter, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated.

Through the above process, a fraud occurrence command is transmitted to the production control device 300 when a fraud occurs, and a fraud release command is transmitted to the production control device 300 along with a fraud release, and the start and end of fraud notification are set. The Rukoto.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of winning number counter update processing. The winning number counter updating process is executed in step A2111 of the fraud & winning monitoring process shown in FIG.

First, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the number of winning port switches to be monitored from the winning port monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not there is an input (more accurately, an input change) to the target winning port switch. (A2202). If there is no input (the result of A2202 is “N”), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211), and it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all the switches has been completed (A2212).

On the other hand, when there is an input to the target prize opening switch, the game control device 100 (A220).
The result of 2 is “Y”), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (A2203), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2204). Further, it is determined whether an overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2205).

If no overflow has occurred (the result of A2205 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (A2206). After the processing of step A2206 is completed, or when an overflow occurs (result of A2205 is “Y”), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (A2207).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2208), and determines whether an overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2209). If no overflow occurs (the result of A2209 is “N”), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (A2210). After the process of step A2206 is completed or when an overflow occurs (result of A2209 is “Y”), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211). Then, it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all the switches has been completed (A2212).

If the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (the result of A2212 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target prize-winning switch.
Return to the process. Further, when monitoring of all the switches is completed (the result of A2212 is “Y”
), The winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area and the winning information is stored.

[Direction command setting processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect command setting process for setting the effect command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

First, the game control device 100 reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (
A2301). Further, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A2302).

If the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A2302 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 writes the command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2303).

When the transmission buffer is full (the result of A2302 is “Y
”), The process returns to step A2301.

Further, the game control device 100 reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A2304), and determines whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A2305). If the transmission buffer is full (the result of A2305 is “Y”), the process returns to step A2304.

In addition, when the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A2305 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 writes the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) in the serial transmission buffer (A2306), and then sets the production command. End the process.

As described above, the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, so that the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the effect command can be made difficult. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Special Figure 2 Abnormal Variation Monitoring Processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process. The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is executed in step A200 in the winning prize switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG.
7 is executed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (A2401). As will be described later, the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set each time the special figure 1 fluctuation display game starts in a low probability state (including the normal game state). When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is not set (the result of A2401 is “
N "), the process proceeds to step A2407.

The game control device 100 has a special figure 1 fluctuation check flag set (A2401).
Is "Y"), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is cleared (A2402), and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by 1 (added by 1) (A2403). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation number is smaller than a prescribed value (for example, 18) (A2404). If the special figure 1 fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (the result of A2404 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2407.

When the number of fluctuations in the special figure 1 is equal to or greater than the specified value (the result of A2404 is “N”)
), If the number of abnormal fluctuations is not 0, -1 is updated (subtracted by 1) (A2405).
The fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (A2406).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (A2407). When special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is not set (A240
7 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2410. As will be described later, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set each time the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts in a low probability state (including a normal game state).

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (A2407)
Is "Y"), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is cleared (A2408), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by 1 (A2409). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than a prescribed value (for example, 5) (A2410).

When the number of abnormal fluctuations in the special figure 2 is equal to or greater than the specified value (the result of A2410 is “
N "), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the specified value used in the determination in step A2410 (A2411). Next, an initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is set in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer as an error notification timer (A2412), and a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag indicating the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is prepared ( A2413), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is prepared as an effect command (A2414), and the process proceeds to step A2419.

When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (the result of A2410 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer by −1 (A2415). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation notification timer has expired (A2416). If the time is not up (result of A2416 is “N”), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated.

When the game control apparatus 100 has timed up (result of A2416 is “Y”), the special figure 2
An abnormal fluctuation cancellation flag is prepared (A2417), and a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command is prepared as an effect command (A2418). Next, it is determined whether or not the prepared flag is the same as the current special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation flag area value (A2419). The prepared flag is the current special figure 2
If it is the same as the value of the abnormal fluctuation flag area (the result of A2419 is “Y”), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated.

When the prepared flag is different from the current special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation flag area value (result of A2419 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag. Is determined (A2420). When the prepared flag is not a release flag (A242)
If the result of 0 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2422.

When the prepared flag is a release flag (the result of A2420 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 clears the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number to 0 (A2421). That is, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is set in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag is prepared (A2417), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0. To do. Thereafter, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation flag area in the RWM (A2422). That is, if the prepared flag is different from the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area flag, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area is rewritten with the prepared flag. Next, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2423), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated.

When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag indicating the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation (abnormal execution state of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area, an external information editing process described later is performed. Thus, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer). When the production control device 300 receives the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command as the production command, the production control device 300 performs error notification on the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b.

In the normal gaming state (the probability of a big hit is low), the player usually aims to win the first start winning opening 36 by left-handed, but the second start winning opening 37 rather than winning the first starting winning opening 36. When the player wins an advantage to the player (when the probability of a small hit is high), the player may aim at the second start winning port 37 by right-handed. In this case, a special figure 2 variable display game may be executed by winning at the second start winning opening 37, and an error notification is given to stop the player from making a right strike. In the normal gaming state, if left-handed is performed,
Processing is performed in the normal route as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 23, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command (that is, error notification) does not occur, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notice timer does not start.

With reference to the time charts of FIGS. 24A to 24C, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process will be further described. 24A to 24C illustrate the result of the above-described special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process.

As shown in FIG. 24A, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed a plurality of times in the normal gaming state (while the hit probability is low), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches a specified value (here, 5) (A241).
The result of 0 is “N”), the initial value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer (60 seconds) and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command can be set (A2412, A2414), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is received. The effect control device 300 can start notification of an error with the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b.

After that, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is subtracted by 1 from the specified value (here, 5) (A
2411), unless the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set again, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is continuously updated by -1 from the next special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process and can be timed (A2410).
Result is “Y”). The effect control device 300 can continue the error notification until the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer expires after a period (60 seconds) corresponding to the initial value elapses and a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is received. Even during error notification, award balls are paid out.

During the error notification period (60 seconds), external information is output to the external information terminal 71 to notify the occurrence of an error to an external device such as a hall computer. A machine error status signal can be output (external information editing process described later).

When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer reaches the specified value (here, 5) again while the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is counting (error notification), the initial value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is reset again. The error notification for 60 seconds can be started from there (timer reset). Also, a big hit (
At the start, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is transmitted, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer, and the special figure 1 fluctuation number are cleared to 0 (the special figure display processing described later, fanfare /
Interval process transition setting process).

In FIG. 23, the variation check flag is set when the special figure variation display game starts in the low probability state, but the variation check flag has won the start winning opening in the low probability state. Control may be performed as set in the case. In this case, as shown in FIG. 24B, control is performed using the number of winnings instead of the number of fluctuations, and there are a plurality of winnings (special figure 2 winnings) at the second start winning opening 37 in the normal gaming state. Fig. 2 The number of abnormal winnings is a specified value (here 5
) Error notification can be started.

In the control of FIG. 23, as shown in FIG. 24A, after the error notification by the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is completed, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is set to 0 (A2421), but as shown in FIG.
Special Figure 2 The number of abnormal fluctuations (number of abnormal winnings) may be maintained at a specified value.

In FIG. 24C, when the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches a predetermined value (18 in this case) (the result of A2404 is “N”), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by −1 and decreased from, for example, 4 to 3. (A2405
), The special figure 1 variation number is cleared to 0 and changes from 18 to 0 (A240).
6). In this way, in the normal gaming state (the probability of hitting is low), the right-handed special figure 2
Even if the fluctuation display game is executed multiple times and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number rises, if the player returns to the left-handed (stops right-handing) and the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches the specified value, FIG. 2 can reduce the number of abnormal fluctuations and avoid error notification.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine state check process is performed in step A201 in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.
0, A2012 and A2015.

First, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2501). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. The relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is the same as described in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (
A2502). When the signal to be checked is not on (result of A2502 is “N”), that is, when the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2503), and the target state off command is acquired. And prepare (A2504). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2505). The state off flag indicates a normal state with respect to an error signal, and indicates a non-touch state with respect to a touch switch signal.

On the other hand, when the check target signal is on (result of A2502 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a state on flag as the state flag (A2506), acquires the target state on command, and prepares (A2507). Further, the target state on-monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2508). The state on flag indicates an abnormal or illegal state for an error signal, and indicates a touched state for a touch switch signal.

When the process of step A2505 or step A2508 is completed, the game control device 100
Determines whether the value of the target signal control region matches the acquired signal state (A2).
509). If they do not match (the result of A2509 is “N”), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2510), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2510).
2511).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by 1 (A2512).
. Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2513). If the updated state monitoring timer value is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2513 is “N”), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2513 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1, and the timer comparison value− The value is kept at 1 (A2514). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2515). If they match, (A251
If the result of 5 is “Y”), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2515 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2516). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2517), and the gaming machine state check process ends. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error command, the effect control device 300 is caused to start error notification.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout busy signal check process. The payout busy signal check process is executed in step A2016 in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (A2601). The payout busy signal is sent to the payout control device 20.
When 0 cannot start the payout control, it is turned on.

When the payout busy signal is not on, the game control device 100 (the result of A2601 is “
N "), an idle state flag is prepared as a determination status (A2602), and an OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (A2603). On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is on (the result of A2601 is “Y”), a busy state flag is prepared as a determination status (A2604), and an on-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (A2605). ).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the busy signal state area matches the state (ON / OFF) of the current payout busy signal (A2606). If they match (the result of A2606 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2609. If they do not match (the result of A2606 is “N”), the current payout busy signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (A2607), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (A2608).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by 1 (A2609), and determines whether the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (A2610). If the monitoring timer is less than the timer comparison value (the result of A2610 is “N”), the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

When the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (result of A2610 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by −1 and keeps the value by 1 smaller than the timer comparison value (A2611). The prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (busy signal status area) (A2612), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

Based on the payout busy signal, the payout busy signal flag (
Busy signal status) is set. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the timer comparison value. It is hard to be affected by such as.

In addition, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and becomes an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the timer comparison value. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A1309) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a starting port 1 winning monitoring table for monitoring winnings to the first starting winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2701), and executes hard random number acquisition processing for acquiring hard random numbers. (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening prize at the first start winning opening 36 (A2703). If there is no start opening prize (the result of A2703 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2709.

The game control apparatus 100 has a start opening prize to the first start winning opening 36 (A2703).
Is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the occurrence probability of hit is in a low probability state (A2704).
. And, in the case of a low probability state (including during the normal gaming state) (the result of A2704 is “Y”)
), The process proceeds to step A2707.

The game control device 100 prepares a right-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A2705) when the occurrence probability of hit is not in a low probability state (when it is in a high probability state) (result of A2704 is “N”). Command setting processing is executed (A2706). As a result, the production control device 300 can display a right-handed instruction display for instructing right-handed as a warning on the display device 41 when there is a starting-open winning to the first starting winning-winning port 36 in a high probability state. it can.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold due to winning in the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and executes the special drawing start opening 1 switch process (A2708). ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a start port 2 winning monitoring table for monitoring a winning at the second start winning port (start port 2) 37 (A2709), and executes a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number. (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening prize in the second start winning opening 37 (A2711). When there is no start opening prize (result of A2711 is “N”
), The start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

The game control apparatus 100 has a start opening prize to the second start winning opening 37 (A2711).
Is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (that is, a probability variation state) (A2712). When it is not a high probability state (when it is a low probability state) (the result of A2712 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a big hit state is being established (A2713). When it is not in the big hit state (the result of A2713 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (A27).
14). Whether or not a high-probability final change is in progress can be determined based on a high-probability final change flag set in a high-probability change number update process described later.

Here, the high probability final change (high probability final change) is a final special figure change display game when the special figure change display game starts in a high probability state. For example, ST (special time) This is a final special figure variation display game in a case where a high probability state is maintained for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) of variation start after the big hit.

When the gaming control device 100 is not in the high probability final variation (the result of A2714 is “N”),
A left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2715), and an effect command setting process is executed (A2716). Thereby, the production control device 300 displays a left-handed instruction display for instructing left-handed on the display device 41 as a warning when there is a starting-open winning for the second starting winning-winning port 37 during the normal gaming state. Can do.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold due to winning in the second start winning opening 37 (starting opening 2) (A2717), and executes the special drawing start opening 2 switch process (
A2718), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. When the gaming control device 100 is in a high probability state (result of A2712 is “Y”), is in a big hit state (result of A2713 is “Y”), is in a high probability final change (result of A2714) Is “Y”), the process of steps A2717 and A2718 is executed without preparing the left-handed instruction notification command.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the hard random number acquisition processing (A2702, A2) in the above-described start port switch monitoring processing
Details of 710) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of hard random number acquisition processing.

First, the game control device 100 sets start port no-win information indicating that there is no start port win (A2801). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (A2802).
If there is no input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. The target switch is the start port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process in step A2702, and the start port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process in step A2710.

When there is an input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is “Y
]), The random number latch register status (the state of the random number latch register) is read, and it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (A2803, A2804).
If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

The game control device 100, when there is latch data in the target random number latch register (A280
The result of 4 is “Y”), the jackpot random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (A2805), and the start opening winning information indicating that there is a starting opening is set (A2806). . The prepared jackpot random number is used in the special figure start port 1 switch process and the special figure start port 2 switch process.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
Next, the special start port 1 switch process (A2708) in the start port switch monitoring process described above.
) Will be described in detail. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 1 switch process.

The game control device 100 first loads the start port 1 signal output count, which is the number of times that information related to the number of wins to the start port 1 switch 36a is output to the management device external to the gaming machine 10 (A2901). Furthermore, the value of the loaded start port 1 signal output count is updated by +1 (A2
902), it is determined whether or not the number of outputs overflows (A2903).

When the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the updated value in the start port 1 signal output number area of the RWM (A2904).
). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the process of step A2905 is executed without executing the process of step A2904.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure hold (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the starting port 1 switch 36a is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A2905). If the number of special figure hold is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special figure start port 1 switch process is terminated.

The game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A2906) and updates the special figure 1 hold number by +1 when the special figure hold number is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”). (A2907). The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including sorting of prefetched variation patterns).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number (A2908), and saves the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process in the RWM big hit random number storage area (A2909). ). Subsequently, a jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A291).
0), the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the RWM jackpot symbol random number storage area (A2911).
Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2
912). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area (variation pattern random number 1 storage area, variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) of the RWM ( A2913).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure hold information determination process (prefetch process, pre-determination process) for determining the special figure hold information (A2914), and the special figure 1 hold number indicating the special figure 1 hold number. A command is prepared as an effect command (A2915), and an effect command setting process is executed (A
2916), the special figure starting port 1 switch processing is terminated. Details of the special figure hold information determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
Next, the special drawing start port 2 switch process (A2718) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process.
) Will be described in detail. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure start port 2 switch process.

A start port 2 signal output count, which is the number of times information related to the number of winnings to the start port 2 switch 37a, is output to the management device external to the gaming machine 10 is loaded (A3001). further,
The loaded start port 2 signal output count value is updated by +1 (A3002), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (A3003).

When the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A3003 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the updated value in the start port 2 signal output number area of the RWM (A3004).
). On the other hand, when the output count overflows (the result of A3003 is “Y”), the process of step A3005 is executed without executing the process of step A3004.

Next, the game control device 100 is in a state where the winning to the second starting winning port 37 is invalid, that is, the starting port 2
It is determined whether or not the detection of the switch 37a is invalid (A3005). It should be noted that the big hit fluctuation / small hit fluctuation is stopped (during special chart display processing described later), the big hit state (from the big hit fluctuation stop to the later big hit end processing), and the small hit state (from the small hit fluctuation stoppage) When the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (during variation), even if a game ball has entered the second start winning opening 37, the second start is performed. It is treated as invalid if the winning opening 37 has not been won. When the winning to the second start winning opening 37 is invalid (the result of A3005 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the special figure starting opening 2 switch process.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the winning to the second start winning opening 37 is not invalid (A3
The result of 005 is “N”), and the special figure 2 holding number is set to 1 (A3006). Note that the special figure 2 variable display game starts as soon as the special figure 2 start memory is generated, but the special figure 2 hold number is set to 1 for the necessity of control. Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 start storage (A3007), and saves the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (A3008). .

Subsequently, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (A3009), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3010). Furthermore, a small hit design random number is extracted, RWM
Are saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area (A3011). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2, 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area (variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) of the RWM (A3012). The two-switch process is terminated.

As described above, since the special figure 2 variation display game starts as soon as the special figure 2 start memory is generated, the special figure start opening 2 switch process is different from the special figure start opening 1 switch process. , Special figure hold information determination process (prefetching process, prior determination process) is not performed, decorative special figure 2
No pending number command is also prepared.

In this way, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning areas of the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, and extracts the variable display game. A start winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start storage serving as an execution right is provided. In addition, the start winning storage means (game control device 100) performs first start storing (with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit of various random numbers extracted based on winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 ( Special figure 1 start memory, special figure 1 start winning memory), and various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37, up to a predetermined number (here 1) 2 is stored as a start memory (a special figure 2 start memory, a special figure 2 start winning memory).

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, special figure hold information determination process (A2914) in the special figure start port 1 switch process described above
Details will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure hold information determination processing (prefetching processing, pre-determination processing). Note that the special figure hold information determination process is executed only for the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36.

The game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the winning probability is a high probability state (that is, a probability variation state) (A3101). If it is not a high probability state (the result of A3101 is “N”), it is determined whether or not it is in a big hit state (A3102). When it is not in the big hit state (the result of A3102 is “N”), the big hit determination process is executed based on the big hit random number value stored as the first start memory (A3103).

In addition, when it is in a high probability state (result of A3101 is “Y”) or is in a big hit state (result of A3102 is “Y”), the special figure hold information determination processing does not perform the big hit determination processing or the like The process is terminated as it is (prejudgment (prefetching) is not performed).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3104). When the determination result is a big hit (result of A3104 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number check table is set (A3105), the big hit stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (A3106), and step A3111 Move on to processing.

When the determination result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (out of case) (the result of A3104 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs the small hit determination process based on the big hit random number value stored as the first start memory. Execute (A3107), and determine whether or not the determination result is a small hit (
A3108). In this embodiment, a big hit random number is also used for the small hit determination.

When the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (the result of A3108 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets stop symbol information for the small hit (A3109), and the determination result is not a small hit (A3108). Is “N”), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (A3110).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the acquired or set stop symbol information as an effect command (A3111), and executes an effect command setting process (A3112). Then, a special figure 1 information setting process (A3113) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and a special figure 1 for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The variation pattern setting process (A3114) is executed.
Subsequently, a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number and the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A3115), and an effect command setting process is executed (A3116).

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (A3201). When the special figure 2 variable display game is neither in the big hit state nor in the small hit state (the result of A3201 is "N"), a big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3202). In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, a game ball is played by the lower big prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable prize winning device 38 or the upper big prize opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable prize winning device 39. Monitor detection.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (
1 is subtracted) (A3203). The special figure 1 game processing timer is timed by the interruption period (4 msec) of the timer interruption process by -1 update. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. When the special figure 2 variable display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (the result of A3201 is “Y”), the process of step A3203 is performed without performing the process of step A3202. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3204). Special Figure 1 Game processing timer is not 0 (A3204
Is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3219.

When the game control timer is 0 (the result of A3204 is “Y”), that is, when the game control device 100 has timed up or has already timed up,
A special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the game process number is set in the register (A3205). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3).
206). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made with the special figure 1 game process number to execute a game branching process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number (A3207).

When the game process number is “0” in step A3207, the game control device 100
Special Figure 1 Monitors the fluctuation start of the fluctuation display game, and performs the setting of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, the setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 1 fluctuation processing, etc. 1 The normal processing is executed (A3208). Details of the special figure 1 routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “1” in step A3207, the game control device 100
The special-figure 1 in-flight process for setting the stop display time of special figure 1 and information necessary for performing the special-figure 1 display process is executed (A3209). Details of the special figure 1 fluctuation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “2” in step A3207, the game control device 100
If the game result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting according to the type of the big hit, the setting of the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, and processing during the fanfare / interval are performed. Special figure 1 to set information necessary for
Processing during display is executed (A3210). For details of the special figure 1 display processing, refer to FIG.
7 will be described later.

If the game process number is “3” in step A3207, the game control device 100
A fanfare / interval process is performed for setting the opening time of the special winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening (A3211). Details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “4” in step A3207, the game control device 100
If the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, or the information necessary for performing the winning ball remaining ball processing is set. Medium processing is executed (A3212). Details of the special winning opening open process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “5” in step A3207, the game control device 100
If the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the processing for setting the necessary winning ball remaining balls for setting the information necessary for the big hit end process, etc. Execute (A3213). For details of the winning ball remaining ball processing, see FIG.
Will be described later.

When the game process number is “6” in step A3207, the game control device 100
A special figure 1 big hit end process is executed to set a special figure 2 game wait time value (described later) or to set information necessary for executing the special figure 1 normal process (A3214). Special figure 1
Details of the big hit end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “7” in step A3207, the game control device 100
A small hit fanfare process is performed to set the opening time of the big prize opening, update the number of releases, set information necessary for performing the small hit process (A3215). Details of the small hitting fanfare process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “8” in step A3207, the game control device 100
A process for setting a small hitting end command and a small hitting medium process for setting information necessary for performing the small hitting remaining ball process are executed (A3216). Details of the small hitting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “9” in step A3207, the game control device 100
A small hit remaining ball process is executed to set a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening and to set information necessary for performing the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3217). .
Details of the small hit remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “10” in step A3207, the game control apparatus 100 sets information for special figure 2 game wait time (described later) or information necessary for executing special figure 1 routine processing. The special figure 1 small hit end processing which performs the setting etc. is executed (A3218). Details of the special figure 1 small hit end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process based on the special figure 1 game process number is completed, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3219), and then displays the special figure 1 display. The symbol variation control process related to the container 51 is executed (A3220), and the special figure 1 game process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 game process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 game process.

First, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (A3301). When the special figure 2 variable display game is neither in the big hit state nor in the small hit state (the result of A3301 is “N”), a big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, a game ball is played by the lower big prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable prize winning device 38 or the upper big prize opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable prize winning device 39. Monitor detection.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (
1 is subtracted) (A3303). The special figure 2 game process timer is timed by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by -1 update. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. When the special figure 2 variable display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (the result of A3301 is “Y”), the process of step A3303 is performed without performing the process of step A3302. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3304). Special figure 2 Game processing timer is not 0 (A3304
Is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3322.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3304 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the special figure 2
It is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 0 (A3305). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3305 is “N”),
The number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3306), and a long fluctuation timer value (for example, 60000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (
A3307). As will be described later, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is long fluctuation and the fluctuation time is long (for example, 10 minutes), the timer of the fluctuation time cannot be set with 2 bytes, so steps A3303-A3307 In this process, the long variation timer value is counted for the number of repetitions, and a timer with a long variation time for a special figure 2 variation display game is prepared.

The game control apparatus 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3304 is "Y") and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y") The special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (A3308). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3309). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made with the special figure 2 game process number, and a game branching process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is executed (A3310).

When the game process number is “0” in step A3310, the game control device 100
Special figure 2 The fluctuation start of the fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, the setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 2 fluctuation processing, etc. 2 The normal processing is executed (A3311). Details of the special figure 2 routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “1” in step A3310, the game control device 100
A special figure 2 changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure 2 and setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process is executed (A3312). Details of the special figure 2 changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “2” in step A3310, the game control device 100
If the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting according to the type of jackpot, the setting of the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each jackpot, and processing during the fanfare / interval are performed. Special figure 2 to set necessary information for the purpose
Processing during display is executed (A3313). For details of the special figure 2 display processing, refer to FIG.
8 will be described later.

When the game process number is “3” in step A3310, the game control device 100
Fanfare / inter-interval processing is executed for setting the opening time of the big winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting information necessary for performing processing during opening of the big winning opening (A3314). The fanfare / inter-interval process is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “4” in step A3310, the game control device 100
If the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, or the information necessary for performing the winning ball remaining ball processing is set. Medium processing is executed (A3315). The special winning opening opening process is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “5” in step A3310, the game control device 100
If the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the processing for setting the necessary winning ball remaining balls for setting the information necessary for the big hit end process, etc. Execute (A3316). The special winning opening remaining ball process is the same as that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “6” in step A3310, the game control device 100
Special Figure 2 A special figure 2 jackpot ending process for setting information necessary for executing the normal process is executed (A3317). Details of the special figure 2 big hit end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “7” in step A3310, the game control device 100
The small hitting fanfare mid-process for setting the opening time of the big prize opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting the information necessary for performing the small hitting mid-process is executed (A3318). It should be noted that the small hitting fanfare process is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “8” in step A3310, the game control device 100
A process for setting a small hitting end command and a small hitting medium process for setting information necessary for performing the small hitting remaining ball process are executed (A3319). Note that the small hitting process is the same as that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “9” in step A3310, the game control device 100
A small hit remaining ball process is executed to set a time for discharging the remaining ball in the big winning opening and to set information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3320). .
The small hit remaining ball process is the same as that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “10” in step A3310, the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure 2 small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3321). Details of the special figure 2 small hit end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process based on the special figure 2 game process number is completed, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the special figure 2 display 52 (A3322), and then displays the special figure 2 display. The symbol variation control process related to the container 52 is executed (A3323), and the special figure 2 game process is terminated.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A
3202 and A3302) will be described in detail. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

First, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the upper prize winning opening (second special variable winning prize apparatus 39) is being opened (A3401). If the upper prize winning opening is not being opened (the result of A3401 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball processing of the top prize winning opening is being performed (A3402). When the remaining ball processing of the upper prize winning opening is not in progress (the result of A3402 is “N”), it is determined whether the lower prize winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is being opened (A3403). In the case of the big hit state or the small hit state, the upper big prize port and / or the lower big prize port can be open.

When the game control device 100 is opening the Shimodai prize opening (the result of A3403 is “Y”)
Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower prize winning switch (A3404), and if there is an input to the lower prize winning switch (the result of A3404 is “Y”), it is added in the current big prize opening switch monitoring process. The winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is set to 1 (A3405). When the lower prize winning opening is not being opened (A3403 result is “N”) or when there is no input to the lower prize winning switch (A3404 result is “N”), the special prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. To do.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is opening the upper prize winning opening (the result of A3401 is “
Y "), or when the remaining ball processing of the upper prize winning opening is being performed (the result of A3402 is" Y "), the winning counter is set to 0 (A3406). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 1 among the upper prize winning switch 39a (A3407). When there is no input to the upper prize winning switch 1 (the result of A3407 is “N”). ), The process proceeds to step A3411.

When there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 1 (the result of A3407 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a prize winning count command as an effect command in order to produce an effect by winning (A3408). The effect command setting process is executed (A3409), and the winning counter is updated by one (A3410).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 2 (A3411). When there is no input to the upper university winning prize switch 2 (the result of A3411 is “N
]), The process proceeds to step A3415. When there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 2 (the result of A3411 is “Y”), a prize winning count command is prepared as an effect command to perform an effect by winning (A3412), and an effect command setting process is executed. (A341
3) The winning counter is updated by +1 (A3414).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning counter is 0 (A3415).
If the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3415 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (A3416). When the winning prize remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3416 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (A3417). When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3417 is “N”), the value of the winning counter (in this case, 1 or 2) is added to the number of the big winning mouth count (A3418).

On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines that the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3415 is “Y
)), When the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (A3416 result is “Y”), or when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (A3417 result is “Y”), the big winning port switch monitoring process Exit.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the number of the big prize mouth count is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, 9) (A3419). Is less than the upper limit (the result of A3419 is “N”), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the number of winning prizes count is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of A3419 is “Y”), the number of winning prizes is kept at the upper limit (A3420), and the target special game processing timer area is set to 0
Clear (A3421).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit is being released (A3422).
When the big hit is not being released (the result of A3422 is “N”), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the big hit is being released (the result of A3422 is “Y”), the big hit opening operation end value is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (A3423), and then the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 routine process (A3208) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the routine of the special figure 1 routine.

First, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game can be changed (A3501). Special figure 1 If the fluctuation display game is not possible to start fluctuation (if the fluctuation start is not possible) (result of A3501 is “N”), the special figure 1 game processing number area of the RWM
The normal processing number “0” is saved (A3502). Here, from the end of the big hit change of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (during the special figure 2 display process) to the end of the big hit operation (special figure 2 big hit end process), and the small figure of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game From the end of the hit variation (during the special figure 2 display process) to the end of the small hit operation (the special figure 2 small hit end process), the special figure 1 fluctuation display game cannot be changed.

The game control apparatus 100 is able to start the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3501).
Is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the left hand instruction has been notified (A3503). If the left-handed instruction notification command has already been prepared as the effect command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handed instruction notification has been completed. When the left hand instruction has been notified (A35
If the result of 03 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3507.

When the game control device 100 has not notified the left hand instruction (the result of A3503 is “N”)
The left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A3504), the effect command setting process is executed (A3505), and the left-handed instruction notification indicating that the display device 41 or the like is notified (displayed) A flag is set (A3506).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (A3507).
. When the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (the result of A3507 is “Y”), the special figure 1 normal process number “0” is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area of the RWM (A3502). Thus, the special figure 1 routine processing is repeated until the special figure 1 holding number becomes 1 or more.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3507 is “N”),
A variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) is prepared as an effect command (A3508), and an effect command setting process is executed (A3509).
). Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process for starting the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed (A
3510). Thereafter, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared as an effect command (A3511), and an effect command setting process is executed (A3512).

Next, the game control device 100 sets information in the special figure 1 fluctuation in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3513). Here, in the special figure status area, information on special figure 1 fluctuation or (during special figure 1 fluctuation + special figure 2 fluctuation) is set. Next, it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (A3514).
In the case of a low probability state (the result of A3514 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a high probability final variation is being performed (A3515). Whether or not a high-probability final change is in progress can be determined based on a high-probability final change flag described later.

When the gaming control device 100 is not in the high probability final variation (the result of A3515 is “N”),
The special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (A3516), and the special figure 1 fluctuation process transition setting process is executed (A3517). The special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is used in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (FIG. 23).

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A3514 is “Y”),
Alternatively, when the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (the result of A3515 is “Y”), the special-figure 1 fluctuation processing transition setting process is executed without setting the special-figure 1 fluctuation check flag (A3517).

[Special Figure 2 Regular Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 routine process (A3311) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 routine processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game can be changed (A3601). When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not possible to start fluctuation (when the fluctuation start is impossible) (result of A3601 is “N”), the special figure 2 in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM
The normal processing number “0” is saved (A3602). Here, from the end of the big hit change of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (during the special figure 1 display process) to the end of the big hit operation (the special figure 1 big hit end process), the small figure of the special figure 1 variable display game From the end of the hit variation (during the special figure 1 display process) to the end of the small hit operation (the special figure 1 small hit end process), the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started.

The game control apparatus 100 determines that the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing (A3601).
Is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 holding number is 0 (A3602). When the special figure 2 holding number is not 0 (the result of A3602 is “N”), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) is prepared as an effect command (A3603).
), Execution command setting processing is executed (A3604). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation start process for starting the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3605).

Next, the game control device 100 sets information in the special figure status change in the RWM (information addition) (A3606). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing or that the special figure 1 is changing + the special figure 2 is being changed is set. Next, it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is a high probability state (A3607).
In the case of a low probability state (the result of A3607 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a high probability final variation is being performed (A3608). Whether or not a high-probability final change is in progress can be determined based on a high-probability final change flag described later.

When the gaming control device 100 is not in the high probability final variation (the result of A3608 is “N”),
The special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (A3609), and the special figure 2 fluctuation process transition setting process is executed (A3610). The special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is used in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (FIG. 23).

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A3614 is “Y”),
Alternatively, when the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (the result of A3615 is “Y”), the special-figure 2 fluctuation process transition setting process is executed without setting the special-figure 2 fluctuation check flag (A3617).

When the special figure 2 holding number is 0 (the result of A 3602 is “Y”),
It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (A3611). When special figure 1 hold number is 0 (
The result of A3611 is “Y”), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A3612). When Special Figure 1 is not changing (A3612 result is “N”
), It is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3613). If the customer waiting demo has not been started (the result of A3613 is “N”), the customer waiting demo flag is set (A3614).
.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3615), and executes an effect command setting process (A3616).
The presentation control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demo command can execute the customer waiting demo on the display device 41. Thereafter, the special figure 2 process number “0” is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area of the RWM (A3617). Thereby, the special figure 2 routine processing is repeated until the special figure 2 holding number becomes 1.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3611 is “N”), the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed. FIG.
The special figure 2 normal processing number “0” is saved in the game processing number area (A3617). Also, when the special figure 1 is fluctuating (result of A3612 is “Y”), or when the customer waiting demo has been started (result of A3613 is “Y”), the customer waiting demo command is prepared, etc. Without RWM
The special figure 2 normal process number “0” is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (A3617).

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3510) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

The game control apparatus 100 first sets a special figure 1 information setting flag (A3701). The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting fluctuation information (including pre-reading fluctuation pattern distribution).
) Etc. Subsequently, a jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3) for setting shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot.
702), special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A370) related to the setting of special symbol 1 stop symbol (symbol information)
3) A special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3705). ). Subsequently, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3706) for setting a fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting fluctuation start information for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game ( A3707) is executed.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning probability is a high probability state (that is, a probability variation state) (A3708). When not in the high probability state (result of A3708 is “N”)
Then, it is determined whether or not a high-probability final change is in progress (A3709). When the high probability final change is not in progress (the result of A3709 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) (A3710).

When the special figure 2 is changing (the result of A3710 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3711). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3711 is “Y”), that is, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is within the time value range of the special figure 2 game processing timer. If YES, the process proceeds to step A3714.

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (A3
711 is “N”), and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 as the predetermined number.
It is determined whether or not this is the case (A3712). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is less than a predetermined number (here, 4) (the result of A3712 is “N”), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is calculated (A3713). The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is calculated by a value of (special figure 2 game processing timer area value + number of repetitions × 60000 msec).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be started is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (A3714). When the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be started is equal to or longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (
The result of A3714 is “N”), and a command for notifying that the variation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prepared as an effect command (
A3715), the effect command setting process is executed (A3716). When the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is equal to or longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a small hit or the like, the display device 41 displays the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display. The production related to the game may end suddenly. For this reason, the effect control device 300 that has received the above command sets (changes) the effect related to the decorative special figure 1 variable display game, for example, to be non-flashy so as not to give the player a sense of incongruity.

Next, the game control device 100 changes the number of times of change in the special figure change display game that starts in the high probability state (
The high probability variation number update process for updating the remaining number) is executed (A3717), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is in a high probability state (result of A3708 is “Y”), when it is in high probability final fluctuation (result of A3709 is “Y”), when special figure 2 is not changing (result of A3710 is “
N "), the process from step A3711 to A3716 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step A3717.

In addition, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (here, 4) (the result of A3712 is “Y”), the game control device 100 also has the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game. (In this case, 240 (= 4 × 60) or more) is longer than the longest variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game, so that the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game is longer. Without proceeding to step A3717.

Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 also displays the special figure 1 variable display game even when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A3714 is "Y"). Step A37 without preparing a command notifying that the fluctuation time of
The process proceeds to 17.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3605) in the special figure 2 ordinary process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

The game control apparatus 100 first sets a special figure 2 information setting flag (A3801). Note that the special figure 2 information setting flag is used for setting fluctuation information (including the distribution of prefetch fluctuation patterns)
) Etc. Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process (A3) for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit.
802), special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (A380) related to the setting of special symbol 2 stop symbol (symbol information)
3) A special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A3805). ). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3806) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and a fluctuation start information setting process (A3806) for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game ( A3807), a high probability variation count update process for updating and managing the variation count (remaining count) of the special figure variation display game started in the high probability state is executed (A3808), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3702) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 39A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the RWM small hit flag 1 area (
A3901a), shift information is saved in the RWM jackpot flag 1 area (A3902a).
). Subsequently, the jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A3903a). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904a).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, that is, whether or not the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A3905a). When the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A3905a is “N”), a big hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed based on the acquired random number for the big hit (A
3906a), it is determined whether or not the determination result is a big hit (A3907a). When the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3907a is “Y”), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A3902a (A3908a).
), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. The big hit flag 1 can be a big hit only when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area), so that the big hit flag 1 and the big hit flag 2 can be avoided simultaneously. .

The game control device 100 determines that the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A3905a is “
Y "), or if the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3907a is" N "), whether the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit based on the acquired big hit random value A small hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not (A3909a), and it is determined whether or not the determination result is a small hit (A3910a). In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit determination (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit determination and the big hit determination).
. When the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A3910a is “Y”), the small hit flag 1 area in which the lost information is saved in step A3901a is overwritten and saved (A3911a). The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910a is “N”), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3802) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 39B is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.

In the big hit flag 2 setting process, “small hit flag 1”, “big hit flag 1”, “big hit flag 2”, “big hit flag 2” in the big hit flag 1 setting process (FIG. 39A). Is replaced with “big hit flag 1” and “special figure 1” is replaced with “special figure 2”, and the same process as the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition,
Steps A3901b to A3911b in the big hit flag 2 setting process respectively correspond to steps A3901a to A3911a in the big hit flag 1 setting process.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, jackpot determination processing (such as jackpot flag 1 setting processing and jackpot flag 2 setting processing) (
Details of A3906a and A3906b) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. Note that the jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3103 of the special figure hold information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A4001), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4002). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

The game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A400
2 is “Y”), the determination result is set to a deviation (other than big hit) (A4007), and the big hit determination processing is terminated.

Further, the game control device 100 (A4) when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value.
If the result of 002 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (A40).
03). If the state is a high probability state (the result of A4003 is “Y”), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (A4004). On the other hand, when the state is not a high probability state (the result of A4003 is “N”), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (A4005).

When the upper limit determination value of the jackpot random number value is set, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (A4006). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A4006 is “Y”), the determination result is set to a deviation (other than the big hit) (A4007). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A4006 is “N”), and the jackpot is set as the determination result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, a small hit determination process in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process (
Details of A3909a and A3909b) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3107 of the special figure hold information determination process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4101). Note that “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

Naturally, the range of the small hit determination value (between the small hit lower limit determination value and the small hit upper limit determination value) is set to the aforementioned big hit determination in order to avoid the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game being a small hit and a big hit. The range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value) does not overlap. In this embodiment,
Although a small hit random number is not provided independently and a big hit random number is used for the determination of the small hit, a configuration in which an original small hit random number is provided is also possible.

The game control device 100 determines that the value of the target big hit random number is less than the low hit lower limit determination value (A
4101 is “Y”), the determination result is set to a deviation (A4106), and the small hit determination process is terminated.

In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game. (A4102). If information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A4102 is "Y"), a small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 variable display game is set (A4103). On the other hand, when information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A4102 is “N”), a small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A4104).

When the gaming control device 100 sets the small hit upper limit determination value, it determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (A4105). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A4105 is “Y”), a deviation is set as the determination result (A4106). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (A41
The result of 05 is “N”), and a small hit is set as the determination result (A4107). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

FIG. 42 shows a jackpot probability (probability that the determination result is a big hit), a small hit probability (probability that the determination result is a big hit), a loss probability (determination result is out of place) by the aforementioned big hit determination process and the small hit determination process. The probability is shown for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. FIG. 42 (a) shows the probability in the low probability state, and FIG. 42 (b) shows the probability in the high probability state.

In this embodiment, the jackpot probability (probability of jackpot occurrence) is higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state. The small hit probability (occurrence probability per small hit) is the same in the high probability state and the low probability state. The loss probability (probability of occurrence) is lower in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

In this embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. And the probability of loss is lower in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game (in the high probability state, the loss probability of the special figure 2 variable display game is 0). Accordingly, the winning at the second starting winning opening 37 is more advantageous to the player than the winning at the first starting winning opening 36 (particularly regarding the small hit probability). Is executed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, FIG. 6A, FIG. 6B, the big hit symbol is only a probability variation symbol, and after the big hit state (special game state), it becomes a high probability state (probability variation state) without exception.
The probability change entry rate is 100%. In addition, the high probability state is a predetermined number of times (for example, 5
Continue until the (0 times) variable display game starts.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3703) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, that is, whether or not the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A4301a). When the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A4301a is “Y”), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4302a). Next, the special symbol 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4303a), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol saving area of the RWM (A4304a). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A43).
05a), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306a). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area of the RWM (A4307a), and wins the big prize corresponding to the stop symbol number. Open mouth information is acquired and saved in the RWM special figure 1 big prize mouth open information area (A4308a). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step A4316a. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (the result of A4301a is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the small hit flag 1 is a small hit, that is, the small hit flag 1 area contains the small hit information. It is determined whether it is saved (A4309a). When the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (the result of A4309a is “Y”), the small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4310a). Next, a special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4311a), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (A4312a). By this processing, the type of specific result is selected. Subsequently, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4313a). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step A4316a.

The game control device 100 determines that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (the result of A4309a is “
N "), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol save area (A4314a)
The off-stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area (A4315a). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step A4316a.

The game control apparatus 100 prepares the decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern after steps A4308a, A4313a, and A4315a (A4316a). In addition, the stop symbol pattern includes the off symbol of FIG. 5 and a plurality of jackpot symbols (4R probability variation A2, 8R probability variation A3,
16R probability variation A1, 16R probability variation B1-B3), and a small hit design (special figure 1 small hit). With the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control apparatus 100 displays the decoration special figure 1 command as an effect command.
Save to the command area (A4317a) and execute the effect command setting process (A431)
8a). The decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319a), and sets the special symbol 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) to 0.
Clear (A4320a) and clear the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) to 0 (
A4321a). Thereafter, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3803) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 43A), “small hit flag 1” is set to “small hit flag 2”, “big hit flag 1” is set to “big hit flag 2”, “ Since “Special Figure 1” is replaced with “Special Figure 2”, and the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is performed, detailed description thereof is omitted. Step A4 in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process
301b-A4321b is respectively step A43 in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.
This corresponds to 01a-A4321a.

Note that the stop symbol pattern set in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is the off symbol of FIGS. 6A and 6B, a plurality of big hit symbols (2R probability variation D1, 4R probability variation D3, 8R probability variation E2, 16R probability variation E1, F2, F3) and one of a plurality of small hit symbols (special drawing 2 small hits 1-3). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

As described above, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening 36, and the game ball of the game ball at the second start winning opening 37 is obtained. Based on the detection, a variable display game executing means for executing the special figure 2 variable display game as the variable display game is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A4401). When the state is not a high probability state (when the state is a low probability state) (the result of A4401 is “N”), a variation pattern selection information table is set (A4402). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern shown in FIG. 1 are acquired (A4403).

Here, the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuation. The first half fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern up to the start of reach,
The second half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode after reaching the reach state and corresponds to the type of reach (including normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4404). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4404 is “N”). ), It is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (A4405).
).

When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (A4405)
Is “Y”), and in order to distribute the latter half fluctuation according to the special figure 1 hold number, the special figure 1 hold number is added to the latter half offset data to update the value (A4406), and according to the special figure 1 hold number. In order to distribute the first half fluctuation, the special figure 1 holding number is added to the first half offset data to convert the value (A
4407). Special Figure 1 Fluctuating display game result is not a small hit (out of case) (A44
If the result of 05 is “N”), the processing of step A4406 is not performed, and the special figure 1 holding number is added to only the first half offset data to convert the value (A4407).

When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4404)
The result of step A4405-A4407 is not performed and step A440 is performed.
The first half offset data and second half offset data acquired in step 3 are not updated or converted, and the process proceeds to step A4412.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A4401 is “Y”),
It is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4408). Special Figure 1 If the result of the variable display game is not a big hit (A4408 result is “N”)
First offset data for offset / small hit is set (A4409), and step A441 is set.
The process proceeds to 1. When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4408 is “Y”), the first half offset data for the big hit of the special figure 1 at a high probability is set (A44).
10). Subsequently, second-half offset data for long-term fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A4411). Thereby, in the high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game changes for a long time.

After step A4404, A4407, or A4411, the game control apparatus 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4
412), the latter half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4413), and the special figure 1 information setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A4501). If the state is a high probability state (result of A4501 is “N”), a variation pattern selection information table is set (A4502). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 are acquired (A4503). The first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuation.

On the other hand, the game control apparatus 100 is not in a high probability state (in a low probability state) (A450
1 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A4).
504). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4504 is “N”
), And set the first half offset data for the off / small hit of special figure 2 at low probability (A4505)
), The process proceeds to step A4507. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4504 is "Y"), the first half offset data for the big hit of special figure 2 at the low probability is set (A4506). Subsequently, the second half offset data for long-time fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4507). Thereby, in the low probability state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes long-time fluctuation (long fluctuation).

After step A4503 or A4507, the game control apparatus 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4508), and stores the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2). Save to RWM's Fluctuation Distribution Information 2 area (A450
9) The special figure 2 information setting process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Variation Pattern Setting Process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3706) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group address table (A4601).
, Obtain and prepare the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 (A
4602), the variable pattern random number 1 is loaded as a random number from the variable pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) in FIG. 1 and prepared (A4603).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of date (A4604). If the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of place (the result of A4604 is “Y”), a 2-byte distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A460).
5) When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of place (in case of big hit or small hit) (A
If the result of 4604 is “N”), the distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4).
606).

Note that the structure of the latter half variation group table is different from that for hitting, and the random number for sorting is 1 byte size for hitting, and 2 bytes for offset. The winning size is 1 byte for saving data capacity, but 1 byte is sufficient because the appearance rate per hit of the special figure 1 variable display game itself is low. In the case of winning (in the case of big hit or small hit), only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used.

After step A4605 or A4606, the game control apparatus 100 acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution (A4607). continue,
Fluctuation pattern random number 2 as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1) of special figure 1
Is prepared by loading (A4608), and distribution processing based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4609). Then, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (A4610). Through the above processing, the latter half variation pattern is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is a game execution mode from among a plurality of variations.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4611), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (A4612). Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4613). Further, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) in FIG. 1 (A4614), and a distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution,
Save in the first-half variation number area (A4616), and finish the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.
Through the above processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is a game execution mode from among a plurality of variations.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Pattern Setting Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3806) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets the second half variation selection address table (A4701).
The address of the latter half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (A4
702). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area of FIG. 2 (A4703), and a distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4704). Then, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (A4705). Through the above processing, the latter half variation pattern is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is a game execution mode from among a plurality of variations.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4706), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (A4707). Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4708). Further, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the storage area of the fluctuation pattern random number 3 in FIG. 2 (A4709), and a distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4710).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution,
The first half variation number area is saved (A4711), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is terminated.
Through the above processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is a game execution mode from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte sort processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (A4605) in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a procedure of 2-byte sorting processing. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure 1 variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

First, the game control device 100 checks whether or not the top data of the latter-half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process is a code with no distribution (ie, “0”) (A4801). It is determined whether the code is not assigned (A480).
2).

Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. .

When the first data in the second half variation group table is a code without distribution (the result of A4802 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the data address corresponding to the distribution result (A4807). ) The 2-byte sorting process ends.

On the other hand, when the first data of the second half variation group table is not a code without distribution (the result of A4802 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the first distribution value specified in the second half variation group table. Is acquired (A4803).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value obtained in the process of step A4803 from the random value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in the process of step A4603 of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. A new random value is calculated (A4804). Further, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4805).

When the new random number value is not smaller than “0”, the game control apparatus 100 (A4805)
Is updated to the address of the next distribution value (A4806), step A
The processing after 4803 is executed. That is, the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired (A4803), the random value determined in the process of step A4805 is subtracted as a new random value, and the new random value is further subtracted. Is calculated (A480
4). Then, with respect to the calculated new random value, each process is executed until it is determined in step A4805 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4805 is “Y”). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table.

When the new random number value is smaller than “0”, the game control device 100 (A48)
The result of 05 is “Y”) and updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (A480)
7) End the 2-byte sorting process.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution process (A4606, A4609, A4615, A4704, A4710) in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the distribution process. The sorting process is
Based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the latter half fluctuation selection table of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the latter half fluctuation group table, or on the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2. First half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on variation pattern random number 3
Is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game.

The game control apparatus 100 first prepares the prepared second half variation group table (selection table).
Then, it is checked whether the head data of the latter half variation selection table (selection table) or the first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (A49).
01), it is determined whether the code is not assigned (A4902).

Here, like the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table that does not have a distribution value “0”
That is, a code without sorting is defined at the top.

And the game control apparatus 100, when the first data of the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table is a code without distribution (A490).
The result of 2 is “Y”) and updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (A4907)
), The distribution process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the first data of the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is not an unsorted code, the game control device 100 (A4902).
(N490)), the first distribution value specified in the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table is acquired (A4903).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads the loaded random number value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3).
Is subtracted from the distribution value acquired in step A4903 to calculate a new random number value (A
4904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4905).

When the new random number value is not smaller than “0”, the game control apparatus 100 (A4905)
Is updated to the address of the next distribution value (A4906), step A49
The process after 03 is executed. That is, the distribution values specified next in the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are acquired (A4903), and the distribution value is determined by using the random number determined in step A4905 as a new random value. Subtraction is performed and a new random value is calculated (A4904). The process is executed until it is determined that the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4905 is “Y”). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation number or the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table.

When the new random number value is smaller than “0”, the game control apparatus 100 (A49
The result of 05 is “Y”) and updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (A490)
7) The distribution process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting process (A3 in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process)
707, A3807) will be described in detail. FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the change start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5001). Special figure 1 Information is being set for the variable display game (A5
When the result of 001 is “Y”), the random number storage area (for reserved ball 1) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in FIG. 1 used is cleared (A5002). When information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (result of A5001 is “N”), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game. Clear the storage area (A500
3).

The game control device 100 sets the first half variation time value table after steps A5002 and A5003 (A5004), and acquires the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number (A50).
05). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A5006), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A5007).

Then, the game control apparatus 100 adds the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value (A500
8) The added value is saved in the target special game process timer area (A5009). continue,
It is determined whether or not information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5010). Special figure 1 When information is not being set for the variable display game (result of A5010 is “N”), special figure 2
Since information is being set for the variable display game, it is determined whether or not to start long fluctuation (long-time fluctuation) of the special figure 2 variable display game (A5011).

When the game control apparatus 100 does not start the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (A5011)
Is “N”), and 0 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A50).
12) When starting the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the result of A5011 is “Y”),
9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5013). In the special fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game, a fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) that is not sufficient by the 2-byte timer is changed. Therefore, a predetermined number of repetitions (9 in this case) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is the number of repetitions. Set to area. In a timer interrupt process with an interrupt period of 4 msec (milliseconds), a 2-byte timer can be set up to about 262 seconds.

For example, 60000 ms by saving the added value in the special figure game processing timer area.
If a timer of ec (60 seconds) is set and 9 more iterations are saved,
The timer is subtracted by timer interruption processing (particularly, special figure 2 game processing (FIG. 33)) (A3
303) When the time is up (the result of A3304 is “Y”), the number of repetitions is decremented by 1 (A3306), and the game processing timer is set to 60000 ms (60 seconds) which is a timer value for long variation. As a result, the long fluctuation special figure 2 fluctuation display game, 60000msec
+ (60000 msec × 9) = 10 minutes long variation time.

Note that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game when the fluctuation is not long (the number of repetitions = 0) are the first half fluctuation saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5009. It is an addition value of the time value and the second half fluctuation time value.

The game control device 100 is in the process of setting information regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (A50).
10 results in “Y”), without setting the number of times the timer is repeated, step A5014
Migrate to

After steps A5010, A5012, and A5013, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a change command (MODE) corresponding to the first half change number (A5014), and prepares a change command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half change number (A5015). . Then, an effect command setting process for transmitting the variation command as an effect command is executed (A5016).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5017). Special figure 1 Information is being set for the variable display game (A5
The result of 017 is “Y”), the special figure 1 holding number is updated by −1 (A5018), the contents of the random number storage area related to the special figure 1 variable display game are shifted (A5019), and the free area after the shift is cleared. (A5020). When information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5017)
Since the result of “N” is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, the change start information setting process is performed without shifting the contents of the random number storage area (the special figure 1 hold number is 1). finish.

Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random values stored in the start storage means (game control apparatus 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. Variation commands including information on patterns are listed, and these commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[High probability change count update processing]
Next, the high probability change frequency update process (A in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process)
3717, A3808) will be described in detail. FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of high probability variation number update processing. In the high probability variation number update process, the variation number of the special figure variation display game started in the high probability state (here, the high probability variation number as the remaining variation number) is updated and managed.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A5101). When the state is not a high probability state (when the state is a low probability state) (the result of A5101 is “N”), the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

In addition, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit, it becomes a low probability state (can be set to a low probability state by a fanfare / interval process transition setting process described later). That is, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit, not only the special figure 1 fluctuation display game but also the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed in a low probability state. Not only the FIG. 2 variable display game but also the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in a low probability state. If the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit,
There is a possibility of a high probability state, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may be executed in a high probability state.

When the game control device 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A5101 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the high probability variation number indicating the remaining number of times of the special figure variation display game started in the high probability state by −1 (
1 is subtracted) (A5102). The initial value of the number of high probability fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the high probability state is maintained after the big hit ends, and is set to, for example, 50 (described later, special figure 1 big hit end process or special figure 2 big hit end process) ). Moreover, even if any of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts to fluctuate, the high probability fluctuation frequency is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of high probability fluctuations is 0 (A51).
03). When the high probability variation number is not 0 (the result of A5103 is “N”), that is, when the high probability state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the high probability variation number update process is terminated. When the number of high probability fluctuations is 0 (result of A5103 is “Y”), a signal related to the end of high probability (off data of 2 jackpots) is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A5104). Further, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & short time is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5105). Signals related to the end of high probability & short time are, for example, off data of special symbol 1 high probability state signal, off data of special symbol 2 high probability state signal, off data of special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 variation This is the off data of the time shortening state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area of the RWM (A5106), and saves the special figure low probability & no short time flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM ( A5107), a high-probability final variation flag corresponding to the symbol (Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2) to start variation is set (A5108), and the high-probability variation number update process is terminated.

The high probability final variation flag is information for indicating that the variation started during the high probability even when the probability is low. In the case of high-probability final fluctuation (high-probability final fluctuation), if the probability is not lowered to a low probability immediately after the start of the fluctuation, the winning determination based on the start opening prize during the final fluctuation is performed with high probability. Therefore, the hit probability is set to a low probability by the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag at the start of the change of the high probability final change. Therefore, a high probability final variation flag is set and used to determine whether or not it is a high probability final variation (for example, step A2714).
, A3515, A3608, A3709, etc.). The high probability final variation flag is
It also includes information that can be used to determine which of FIG. 1 or FIG.

As described above, after the big hit, the high probability state is a predetermined number of times (the initial value of the number of high probability fluctuations,
(E.g. 50 times) until a variable display game is started, and when the number of high probability fluctuations = 0 and the predetermined number of fluctuation display games (high probability final fluctuation) is started, there is no special low probability and time saving The flag is set, the low-probability state is reached, the short-time state is terminated, and a high-probability final variation flag is set.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating process transition setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (A3517) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process.

The game control apparatus 100 first sets “1” as the process number in order to shift to the special figure 1 changing process.
Is set (A5201a), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5
202a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A5203a), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in Special Figure 1 (on data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5204a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the changing flag in the special figure 1 changing control flag area (A5205a). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blinking control timer (the timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (A5206).
a) The initial value of the changing symbol number (for example, 0 indicating the non-lighting symbol in FIG. 5) is saved in the special symbol 1 changing symbol number area (A5207a), and the special symbol 1 changing processing transition setting processing is terminated. To do.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (A3610) in the special figure 2 ordinary process will be described. FIG. 52B is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process.

The special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is obtained by replacing "special figure 1" (special symbol 1) with "special figure 2" (special symbol 2) in the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (Fig. 52A). Since the same process as the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is performed, detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition,
Steps A5201b to A5207b in the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process respectively correspond to steps A5201a to A5207a in the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 changing process (A3209) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 changing process.

The game control device 100 first updates the symbol determination number of times output by +1 (A5301).
The symbol determination frequency output count is used in a symbol determination frequency signal editing process described later. Next, the decoration special figure 1 command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and prepared as a production command (A5
302), an effect command setting process is executed (A5303). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5
304), the effect command setting process is executed (A5305).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is a high probability final variation (high probability final variation) (A5306). If the high probability final variation flag is set in step A5108 of the high probability variation number update process, it can be determined that the high probability final variation is present. When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started is a high probability final fluctuation (A530)
6 is “Y”), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 is set as the stop symbol display time (stop display time) of the special figure 1 (A5307). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 mse if the stop symbol pattern is the off symbol of the special symbol 1.
c, 2000 msec for the big hit symbol of Special Figure 1 and 136 for the small hit symbol of Special Figure 1
msec.

Game control device 100, when the special figure 1 variation display game to start is not a high probability final variation (
The result of A5306 is “N”), and the display time at the time of high probability final variation is set as the display time of the special figure 1 (A5308). For example, the display time at the time of high probability final variation is 7000 msec.

After steps A5307 and A5308, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is off (A5309). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of place (the result of A5309 is “Y”), the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (the stop symbol number at the time of loss) is the special figure 1 stop symbol. Load from the evacuation area and Figure 1
Save to the stop symbol area (A5324).

When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of place (in the case of big hit or small hit) (the result of A5309 is “N”), the game control device 100 is also changing the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 variable display game is also It is determined whether or not (A5310). Special figure 2 is not changing (A53
10 results in “N”), the process proceeds to step A5320. If the special figure 2 is also changing (the result of A5310 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not a special figure 2 display process described later is being executed (A5311).

The game control device 100 determines that the special figure 2 display process is being executed (the result of A5311 is “
Y "), the process proceeds to step A5313. When special figure 2 display processing is not being executed (
The result of A5311 is “N”), and the symbol determination count output count is updated by 1 (A5312). Subsequently, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of special figure 1 (display time of special figure 1 + 4 msec) is set as the display time of special figure 2 (A5313) and displayed in the special figure 2 game processing timer area Save time (A5314). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period) in the next special figure 2 game processing (A3303), and is added extra. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol in FIG. 1 and the display time of the stop symbol in FIG. 2 can be made the same. If the stop display of special figure 2 has already been started, the display time is reset here (basically, the display time is extended, but it may be shortened depending on the case).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the off symbol command of the decoration special figure 2 as an effect command (A5315), and executes an effect command setting process (A5316). Subsequently, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5317), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5318). Thereafter, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 for performing the setting for executing the special figure 2 display process is executed (
A5319).

Through the processing of steps A5313 to A5319, in the special-figure 1 fluctuating process, which is the control related to the special-figure 1 fluctuation display game, the result of losing the special-figure 2 fluctuation display game (including the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation-display game) is set. , Execution of special figure 2 display processing (end of special figure 2 variable display game)
Is set. Thus, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed (during the fluctuation of special figure 2), if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a hit result (big hit or small hit), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is Is forcibly terminated (forced termination) by the result of the loss.

The special figure 1 changing process is performed when the fluctuation time ends, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5009) times out (A3204). Since the result is executed at “Y”), when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of the hit result stops fluctuation, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is forcibly ended (forced termination).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special figure 1 command from the decoration special figure 1 command area and saves it in the winning symbol command area (A5320). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (A5321). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5321 is “Y”), the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process described above (the stop symbol number at the time of the small hit) is the special figure 1. Load from the stop symbol save area and save to the special symbol 1 stop symbol area (A5324).

When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (a big win) (the result of A5321 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines the upper limit of the number of rounds from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area. Load the value information, save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5322),
The special prize opening information is loaded from the special figure 1 big winning opening information area and saved in the special winning opening information area (A5323). Thereafter, the information saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special symbol 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area (A5324). Next, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 for setting for executing the special figure 1 display process is executed (A5325), and the special figure 1 changing process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, the game control device 100 is executing a special figure 2 variable display game (during special figure 2 fluctuation).
Even so, when the special figure 1 variable display game is a hit result, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated by the result of losing.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process.

The game control apparatus 100 first updates the symbol determination number output count by +1 (A5401).
The symbol determination frequency output count is used in a symbol determination frequency signal editing process described later. Next, the decoration special figure 2 command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and prepared as a production command (A5
402), an effect command setting process is executed (A5403). After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5
404), the effect command setting process is executed (A5405).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is a high probability final variation (high probability final variation) (A5406). If the high probability final variation flag is set in step A5108 of the high probability variation number update process, it can be determined that the high probability final variation is present. When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to start is not a high probability final fluctuation (A540
6 is “N”), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 is set as the display time (stop display time) of the special symbol 2 (A5407). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 mse if the stop symbol pattern is an off symbol of the special symbol 2.
c, 600msec for the big hit symbol of Special Figure 2, 600m for the small hit symbol of Special Figure 2
sec. In addition, the display time of the off symbol, the big hit symbol, and the small hit symbol in the special figure 2 is the same.

The game control device 100 determines that the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is a high probability final variation (
The result of A5406 is “Y”), and the display time at the time of high probability final change is set as the display time of the special figure 2 (A5408). For example, the display time at the time of high probability final variation is 7000 msec.

After steps A5407 and A5408, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order (A5409). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of place (the result of A5409 is “Y”), the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is displayed as the special figure 2 stop symbol. Load from evacuation area and special figure 2
Save to the stop symbol area (A5424).

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of play (A5410)
Is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is also changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed) (A5410). When Special Figure 1 is not changing (the result of A5410 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5420. When Special Figure 1 is also changing (A5410 result is “Y
]), It is determined whether or not a later-described special figure 1 display process is being executed (A5411).

The game control apparatus 100 determines that the special figure 1 display process is being executed (the result of A5411 is “
Y "), the process proceeds to step A5413. When special figure 1 display processing is not being executed (
The result of A5411 is “N”), and the symbol determination count output count is updated by one (A5412). Subsequently, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of special figure 2 (display time of special figure 2 + 4 msec) is set as the display time of special figure 1 (A5413) and displayed in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Save time (A5414). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 1 game process timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period) in the next special figure 1 game process (A3203), and is added extra. Thereby, the display time of the stop symbol of the actual special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 can be made the same. If the stop display of special figure 1 has already been started, the display time is reset here (basically, the display time is extended, but it may be shortened depending on circumstances).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the off symbol command of the decoration special figure 1 as an effect command (A5415), and executes an effect command setting process (A5416). Subsequently, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5417), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5418). After that, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 for setting for executing the special figure 1 display process is executed (
A5419).

Through the processing of steps A5413 to A5419, in the special-figure 2 fluctuating process, which is the control related to the special-figure 2 fluctuation display game, the result of losing the special-figure 1 fluctuation display game (including the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation-display game) is set. , Execution of special figure 1 display processing (end of special figure 1 variable display game)
Is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (during the special figure 1 fluctuation), if the special figure 2 variable display game is a hit result (big hit or small hit), the special figure 1 variable display game is Will forcibly end the change (end of execution) with the result of the loss.

The special figure 2 changing process is performed at the end of the fluctuation time, that is, when the special figure 2 game process timer is repeated 0 and the special figure 2 game process timer expires (results of A3304 and A3305). Is executed at “Y”), when the special figure 2 variable display game of the winning result stops changing, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended (execution ended).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 loads the decoration special figure 2 command from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saves it in the winning symbol command area (A5420). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5421). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5421 is “Y”), the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (the stop symbol number at the time of the small hit) is the special figure 2 Load from the stop symbol saving area and save to the special symbol 2 stop symbol area (A5424).

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (a big win) (the result of A5421 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines the upper limit of the number of rounds from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area. Load the value information, save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5422),
The special prize opening information is loaded from the special figure 2 big winning opening information area and saved in the special winning opening information area (A5423). Thereafter, the information saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special symbol 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area (A5424). Next, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 for setting for executing the special figure 2 display process is executed (A5425), and the special figure 2 changing process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 is executing a special figure 1 variable display game (during special figure 1 fluctuation).
Even so, when the special figure 2 variable display game is a hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated by the result of losing.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (A5325) in the special figure 1 changing process will be described. FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 display mid-process transition setting process 1.

The game control apparatus 100 first sets “2” as the process number in order to shift to the special figure 1 display process.
Is set (A5501a), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (A55).
02a), the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of special figure 1 (off data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5503a).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 as the special figure 1 variable control flag as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51. The area is saved (A5504a), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (A5425) in the special figure 2 changing process will be described. FIG. 55B is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 2 display mid-process transition setting process 1.

First, the game control device 100 sets “2” as the process number in order to shift to the special figure 2 display process.
Is set (A5501b), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A55).
02b), the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of special figure 2 (off data of the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5503b).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 2 display 52 as the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52. The area is saved (A5504b), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (A5419) in the special figure 2 changing process will be described. FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 display mid-process transition setting process 2. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, information is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated by hitting the special figure 2 variable display game.

The game control apparatus 100 first sets “2” as the process number in order to shift to the special figure 1 display process.
Is set (A5601a), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (A56
02a), a signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5).
603a). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A5604a). ).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol pattern in the stop symbol pattern area (A5605a), clears the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (A5606a),
To clear the special figure 1 large winning opening information area (A5607a). Further, shift information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (A5608a), and shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A5609a). Next, clear the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (A5610a),
Special figure 1 The stop symbol number (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is saved in the stop symbol area (A
5611a). With the above processing, the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 becomes the fluctuation stop (fluctuation end) with the outage stop symbol.

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (A5319) in the special figure 1 changing process will be described. FIG. 56B is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 2 display mid-process transition setting process 2. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, information is set when the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated by hitting the special figure 1 variable display game.

First, the game control device 100 sets “2” as the process number in order to shift to the special figure 2 display process.
Is set (A5601b), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (A56
02b), a signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5).
603b). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A5604b). ).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 shifts to the stop symbol pattern area and saves the stop symbol pattern (A5605b), clears the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (A5606b),
To clear the special figure 2 big prize opening release information area (A5607b). Further, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (A5608b), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A5609b). Next, clear the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (A5610b),
Special figure 2 The stop symbol number (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is saved in the stop symbol area (A
5611b). With the above processing, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52 becomes the stoppage of fluctuation (end of fluctuation) with the outlier stop symbol.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 display process (A3210) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. 57A and 57B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special figure 1 display process. 57A shows the first half of the special figure 1 display process, and FIG. 57B shows the second half of the special figure 1 display process.

First, the game control device 100 starts from the small hit flag 1 area to the small hit flag 1 (small hit information,
Alternatively, the information indicating the loss information is loaded (A5701), and the small hit flag 1 area is cleared (A5702). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 1 area to the jackpot flag 1 (hit information, or
Load (indicating loss information) (A5703) and clear the big hit flag 1 area (A5)
704). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 1 (A5705).

The game control device 100 determines that the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A5705).
Is "Y"), the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5706). For example, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 big hit is the ON data of the condition device operating signal, the ON data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and the ON data of the special symbol 1 signal. Subsequently, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is prepared as an effect command (A5707), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5708).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a round number upper limit table (A5709), and sets the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area from the round number upper limit table. Acquire and save in the round limit upper limit area of RWM (A5
710). The round number upper limit is, for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R. Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5711).

Next, the game control device 100 loads a winning symbol command from the winning symbol command area and prepares it as an effect command (A5712), and executes an effect command setting process (A57).
13). In addition, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, a fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5714), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5715).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state in the external information output data area (A5716). The signals here are, for example, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals that are turned on or off depending on conditions. For example, a jackpot 2 signal turns on at a jackpot other than 2R, turns on at a 2R jackpot with a high probability, and turns off at a 2R jackpot with a low probability,
Three jackpot signals are turned on at a jackpot other than 2R, turned off at a 2R jackpot with a high probability, and turned on at a 2R jackpot with a low probability.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big prize opening information (A5717), and saves the big hit fanfare time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5718). Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the top large winning opening that opens the top large winning opening based on the large winning opening opening information (A5719).

When the game control device 100 is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (the result of A5719 is “Y
)), The upper prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared (A5720), the fraud monitoring outage period flag is saved in the RWM upper winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (A5721), and the fanfare /
In order to shift to the processing during the interval, “3” is set as the processing number (A5724).
If the upper prize winning opening is not a big hit (the result of A5719 is “N”), the lower prize winning counter illegal prize number area is cleared (A5722), and the RWM's lower big prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area is outside the fraud monitoring period. The flag is saved (A5723), and “3” is set as the process number in order to shift to the fanfare / interval process (A5724).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5
725), the fanfare / interval process transition setting process is executed (A5726),
The special figure 1 display process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (A5
705 is “N”), based on the small hit flag 1, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit) ( A5727). When the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a small hit (the result of A5727 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game executed this time has a high probability final fluctuation (A5728). When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game executed this time has a high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5728 is “Y
”), A probability information command (low probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5729), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5730).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery of the RWM (A5731), and clears the left-handed instruction notification flag (A57).
32). The transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery saves a command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery. After that, a winning symbol command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5733), and an effect command setting process is executed (A57).
34). Since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the small hit symbol. On the other hand, when the current special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5728 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines that the game from the step A5729 to the A
Without performing the process of 5732, a hit symbol command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5733), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5734).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5735), and executes an effect command setting process (A5736). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (A5737). If not in a high probability state (
The result of A5737 is “N”), a signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5738), and the second gaming state is notified that it is right-handed In order to turn off the display unit 56 (lamps D8 to D10), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area of the RWM (A5739). In the case of a high probability state (result of A5737 is “Y”), a signal related to the right handing instruction (ON data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5740), and it is right handing To turn on the second gaming state display unit 56 (lamps D8 to D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5741).

After steps A5739 and A5741, the game control device 100 clears the lower prize winning portion fraud winning number area (A5742), saves the fraud monitoring period flag outside the lower big prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A5743), The special figure 1 small hit fanfare process transition setting process is executed (A5744), and the special figure 1 display process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control apparatus 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit) (the result of A5727 is “N”), that is, the special figure 1 variable display game. If the result of the above is out of step, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game executed this time is a high probability final fluctuation (A5745). If it is not a high probability final variation (the result of A5745 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5753.

When the game control apparatus 100 has a high probability final variation (the result of A5745 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a probability information command (low probability) as an effect command (A5746), and executes an effect command setting process (A5747). . Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5748), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (A57).
49). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the small hit state (A5750).
). If the special figure 2 variable display game is in the small hit state (the result of A5750 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A5753.

When the game control device 100 is not in the small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A5750 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the left hand instruction in the test signal output data area (A5).
751). Subsequently, a second gaming state display unit 56 (lamp D8) that informs that it is right-handed.
To turn off D10), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5752), and the special figure status area in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (A5)
753). Thereafter, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of place, the special figure 1 normal process transition setting process 1 is executed (A5754), and the special figure 1 display process is terminated. In the special figure 1 normal process transition setting process 1, in order to shift to the special figure 1 normal process, "0" is set as the process number, and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

[Special figure 2 display processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 displaying process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. 58A and 58B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special figure 2 display processing. 58A shows the first half of the special figure 2 display processing, and FIG. 58B shows the second half of the special figure 2 display processing.

The game control device 100 first starts from the small hit flag 2 area to the small hit flag 2 (small hit information,
Alternatively, the information indicating the loss information is loaded (A5801), and the small hit flag 2 area is cleared (A5802). Subsequently, from the big hit flag 2 area to the big hit flag 2 (hit information, or
Load (indicating loss information) (A5803) and clear the big hit flag 2 area (A5)
804). Subsequently, based on the big hit flag 2, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A5805).

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A5805)
Is "Y"), the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5806). For example, the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is the on data of the condition device operating signal, the on data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and the on data of the special symbol 2 per signal. Subsequently, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is prepared as an effect command (A5807), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5808).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets the round number upper limit table (A5809), and sets the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area from the round number upper limit table. Acquire and save in the round limit upper limit area of RWM (A5
810). The round number upper limit is, for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R. Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5811).

Next, the game control device 100 loads a winning symbol command from the winning symbol command area and prepares it as an effect command (A5812), and executes an effect command setting process (A58).
13). In addition, since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, a fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5814), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5815).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state in the external information output data area (A5816). The signals here are, for example, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals that are turned on or off depending on conditions. For example, a jackpot 2 signal turns on at a jackpot other than 2R, turns on at a 2R jackpot with a high probability, and turns off at a 2R jackpot with a low probability,
Three jackpot signals are turned on at a jackpot other than 2R, turned off at a 2R jackpot with a high probability, and turned on at a 2R jackpot with a low probability.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big prize opening information (A5817), and saves the big hit fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A5818). Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the top large winning opening that opens the top large winning opening based on the large winning opening opening information (A5819).

When the game control device 100 is a big hit for opening the upper prize winning opening (the result of A5819 is “Y
)), The upper prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared (A5820), the fraud monitoring outage period flag is saved in the RWM upper winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (A5821), and the fanfare /
In order to shift to the processing during the interval, “3” is set as the processing number (A5824).
If the upper prize winning opening is not a big hit (the result of A5819 is “N”), the lower prize winning counter illegal prize number area is cleared (A5822), and the RWM's lower big prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area is outside the fraud monitoring period. The flag is saved (A5823), and “3” is set as the process number in order to shift to the fanfare / interval process (A5824).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A5
825), the fanfare / interval process transition setting process is executed (A5826),
The special figure 2 display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit, the game control device 100 (A5
The result of 805 is “N”), and based on the small hit flag 2, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit) ( A5827). When the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit (the result of A5827 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed this time has a high probability final fluctuation (A5828). When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed this time has a high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5828 is “Y
”), A probability information command (low probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5829), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5830).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery of the RWM (A5831), and clears the left-handed instruction notification flag (A58).
32). Thereafter, a winning symbol command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5833), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5834). In addition,
Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the hit symbol command corresponds to the small hit symbol. On the other hand, if the current special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5828 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 does not perform the processing of steps A5829 to A5832 and issues a command from the winning symbol command area. The winning symbol is loaded and prepared as an effect command (A5833), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5834).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5835), and executes an effect command setting process (A5836). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (A5837). If not in a high probability state (
The result of A5837 is “N”), a signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5838), and the second gaming state is notified that it is right-handed In order to turn off the display unit 56 (lamps D8 to D10), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5839). When the probability state is high (A
The result of 5837 is “Y”), a signal related to the right-handed instruction (ON data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5840), and the second gaming state is notified that it is right-handed. In order to turn on the display unit 56 (lamps D8 to D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5841).

After steps A5839 and A5841, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the game is a small hit for opening the top prize winning opening (A5842). When it is a small hit to open the upper prize winning opening (the result of A5842 is “Y”), the upper winning prize area illegal winning number area is cleared (A5843),
Save the non-fraud monitoring period flag in the upper university winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (A5844),
The special figure 2 small hit fanfare process transition setting process is executed (A5847), and the special figure 2 display process is terminated. When it is not a small hit to open the top prize winning opening (result of A5842 is “N”)
In other words, if it is a small hit to open the lower big prize opening, the lower big prize opening illegal prize number area is cleared (A5845), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower big prize prize illegal monitoring period flag area ( A5846), special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process is executed (A5847).
), The special figure 2 display process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control apparatus 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5827 is "N"), that is, the special figure 2 variable display game. If the result of the above is out of step, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed this time has a high probability final fluctuation (A5848). If it is not the high probability final variation (the result of A5848 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5856.

When the game control apparatus 100 has a high probability final variation (the result of A5848 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (low probability) as an effect command (A5849), and executes an effect command setting process (A5850). . Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5851), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (A58).
52). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is in the small hit state (A5853).
). If the special figure 1 variable display game is in the small hit state (the result of A5853 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A5856.

When the game control device 100 is not in the small hit state of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5853 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A5).
854). Subsequently, a second gaming state display unit 56 (lamp D8) that informs that it is right-handed.
In order to turn off D10), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5855), and the special figure status area in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (A5)
856). Thereafter, since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, the special figure 2 normal process transition setting process 1 is executed (A5857), and the special figure 2 display process is terminated. In the special figure 2 normal process transition setting process 1, in order to shift to the special figure 2 normal process, "0" is set as the process number, and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process (A5726, A5826) in the special figure 1 display process and the special figure 2 display process will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process.

First, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the start of the big hit (on data of one signal of the big hit) in the external information output data area (A5901), and saves a signal related to the end of the high probability & short time in the test signal output data area. (A5902), and the round number area for managing the number of rounds in the RWM is cleared (A5903).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A
5904), the special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (
A5905). By setting the special figure low probability & short time flag, the hit probability will be low,
It becomes a state without time reduction (it is not a time reduction state). Subsequently, the production control device 30 when the power failure is restored
Probability information command (in the command area to be sent at power failure recovery to save the command output to 0
(Low probability) is saved (A5906), and the high probability variation count area holding the high probability variation count in the RWM is cleared (A5907).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the big hit information in the special figure status area (A59).
08), the high probability final variation flag area holding the high probability final variation flag in the RWM is cleared (A5909). Subsequently, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (ON data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5910), and the second gaming state display unit 56 (lamp D8) for notifying that it is right-handed. -In order to light D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5911).

Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (A5912), and displays the special figure 2 abnormal number area holding the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number in the RWM. 0 clear (A5913), the special figure 1 fluctuation frequency area that holds the special figure 1 fluctuation number in the RWM is 0
Clear (A5914), clear the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer area holding the value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer in the RWM to zero (A5915), and end the fanfare / interval process transition setting process.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
Next, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (A
5744) will be described in detail. FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process.

First, the game control device 100 sets “7” as the process number in order to shift to the small hit fanfare process (A6001a), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6002a). Subsequently, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6003a), and a signal related to the start of the small hit (on-data of one big hit signal) is saved in the external information output data area. (A6004a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 small hit (on-data of the special symbol 1 small hit signal) in the test signal output data area (A6005a), and is hitting the special figure status area. Information is saved (A6006a). Further, the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (A6007a), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
Next, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (A
5847) will be described in detail. FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process.

Special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process is the same as "Special figure 1" (special symbol 1) in "Special figure 1" (special symbol 2) (special symbol 2). Since the same process as the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that steps A6001b-A6007b in the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process respectively correspond to steps A6001b-A6007b in the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A3211, A3314) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 61 shows fanfare /
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during an interval.

The game control device 100 first updates the number of rounds in the round number area by +1 (A610).
1). Since the number of rounds is set to 0 in the fanfare / interval process transition setting process (A5903), the number of rounds is 0 before the start of the current big hit operation. After that, a round command corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the number of rounds is prepared as an effect command (A6102), and an effect command setting process is executed (A6103).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the big hit midway processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening information and the number of rounds (A6104), and saves it in the big hit middle processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6105). Here, in the case of a pattern that repeatedly opens and closes the big winning opening during one round, 0 is set as the initial value, and in the case of a pattern that opens the big winning opening only once during one round, the upper limit is suddenly set as the initial value. Set the value (= 21). In the case of a pattern that repeats opening and closing, even if it is not 0 as an initial value, it may be a value greater than 0 and less than the upper limit value (ie
Start with an intermediate value). It is also possible to use a pattern that repeats opening and closing for one of the upper prize opening and the lower prize winning opening, and a pattern that opens only once for the other. Both the upper and lower prize winning openings can be opened and closed. It is good also as a pattern which repeats or the pattern opened only once.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the big winning opening information and the number of rounds (A6106). Subsequently, “4” is set as the process number in order to shift to the special winning opening opening process (A6107), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A6108). When the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A6108 is “Y”), this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6109), and the special winning opening opening time is shown in the special figure 1 game processing. Save to the timer area (A6110). If the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A6108 is “N”), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6111), and the special winning opening opening time is set in the special figure 2 game processing timer. Save in the area (A6112).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a big hit to open the top prize winning opening based on the winning prize opening information (A6113). When it is a big hit to open the top prize winning opening (
The result of A6113 is “Y”), and the special winning opening open process transition setting process 1 is executed (A6114).
), The process during the fanfare / interval is terminated. When it is not a big hit to open the upper big prize opening (result of A6113 is “N”), that is, when it is a big hit to open the lower big prize opening,
The special winning opening open process transition setting process 2 is executed (A6115), and the fanfare / interval process is terminated. In this embodiment, there are two types of jackpots that open only the upper prize winning opening and the jackpot that opens only the lower winning prize opening. However, a jackpot that opens both the upper winning prize opening and the lower winning prize opening is provided. Configuration is also possible.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the process for setting the process for setting a special winning opening during the fanfare / interval process 1 (A6114) will be described. FIG. 62A is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the process transition setting process 1 during the big prize opening opening.

The game control device 100 saves the signal related to the start of opening of the top prize winning opening (ON data of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (A6201a), and stores it in the RWM big winning opening solenoid output data area. , The upper prize winning opening on data for turning on the upper prize winning solenoid 39b is saved (A6202a), and the number of big winning prize counts is cleared (A6203a).
The process for setting the transition to the process for opening the special winning opening is completed.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the process for setting a process for setting a special prize opening during the fanfare / interval process 2 (A6115) will be described. FIG. 62B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during the big prize opening opening.

The game control device 100 saves a signal related to the opening of the lower prize winning opening (on-data of the special electric accessory 2 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (A6201b), and saves it in the RWM big prize opening solenoid output data area. The lower prize winning opening on data for turning on the lower prize winning solenoid 38b is saved (A6202b), the big winning prize count is cleared (A6203b),
The process for setting the transition to the process for opening the special winning opening is completed.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process, the special prize opening opening process (A3212)
, A3315) will be described in detail. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process.

First, the game control apparatus 100 loads and prepares the big hit mid-process control pointer (A63).
01) It is determined whether or not the value of the loaded big hit mid-process control pointer is equal to or larger than the big hit operation end value (for example, 21) (A6302). When the value of the big hit processing control pointer is less than the big hit operation end value (the result of A6302 is “N”), the big hit middle processing control pointer is updated by +1 (A6303), and the big hit is performed in accordance with the big hit middle processing control pointer. The action transition setting process is executed (A6304), and the process for opening the special winning opening is completed.

When the value of the big hit processing control pointer is equal to or larger than the big hit operation end value (the result of A6302 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the current round is the final round (A6305). If the round number (A6101) updated by +1 in the fanfare / interval processing is the final round number (for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R),
It can be determined that it is the final round.

When it is not the final round (the result of A6305 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares an interval command as an effect command (A6306), and executes an effect command setting process (A6308). If it is the final round (result of A6305 is “Y”), an ending command is prepared as an effect command (A6307), and an effect command setting process is executed (A6308).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the special winning opening information (
A6309), “5” is set as the processing number in order to shift to the winning prize remaining ball processing (
A6310). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A63).
11). If the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A6311 is "Y"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6312), and the remaining ball processing time is set in the special figure 1 game processing timer. Save in the area (A6313). If the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A6311 is “N”), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6314), and the remaining ball processing time is shown in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Save to (A
6315).

After steps A6313 and A6315, the game control apparatus 100 saves off data in the big prize opening solenoid output data area to turn off both the lower big prize opening solenoid 38b and the upper big prize opening solenoid 39b (A6316), The process during opening of the big prize opening ends.

[Big hit action transition setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit operation transition setting process (A6304) in the special winning opening open process will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit operation transition setting process.

First, the game control apparatus 100 performs a branch using the big hit mid-process control pointer (A640).
1). It is also possible to use the value before the +1 update in step A6303 as the big hit processing control pointer instead of the current value. When the value of the big hit mid-process control pointer is an even number, a wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the big hit mid-process control pointer is set (A
6402), off-data is saved in the winning prize solenoid output data area (A6403).
).

When the value of the big hit mid-process control pointer is an odd number, the game control device 100 sets the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the big hit mid-process control pointer (A6404). For example, in the big winning opening opening time, the big hit mid-process control pointer is 1 to 19 (big hit mid-process control pointer = 1 to 1).
In the case of 9), it is 200 msec, and when the big hit mid-process control pointer is 21 (big hit mid-process control pointer = 21), it is 25000 msec. The 200 msec special winning opening time is used in the case of a pattern that repeatedly opens and closes the special winning opening within a round. Subsequently, upper prize winning opening on data for turning on the upper prize winning solenoid 39b is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area (A6405). As a result, the upper prize winning opening can be repeatedly opened and closed for a short time. Here, when the lower prize winning opening repeatedly opens and closes for a short time, the lower prize winning opening on-data is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area, or the lower prize winning opening on data and the upper prize winning opening are on. A configuration for saving both data is also possible.

After steps A6403 and A6405, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A6406). If the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A6406 is “Y”), the set time (wait time or big prize opening time) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6407). When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (the result of A6406 is “N”), that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit, the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6408). ).

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process, the winning ball remaining ball process (A3213)
, A3316) will be described in detail. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning prize remaining ball processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the current round is the final round (A6501). If it is not the final round (result of A6501 is “N”), a test signal is output for signals related to the end of the special winning opening (off data of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and special electric accessory 2 operating signal) Save in the data area (A6502), set the winning opening opening information and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds (A6503), and set “3” as the processing number to shift to the fanfare / interval processing (A6504) ). As a result, the fanfare / interval processing, the special winning opening open processing, and the special winning opening remaining ball processing are repeated until the final round. The interval period between rounds is the period from the end of the round until the winning ball remaining ball processing time and the interval time elapse.

When the game control device 100 is in the final round (the result of A6501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end process transition setting process for shifting to the jackpot end process (A6505), and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern Is set (A6506), and the processing number is “6”.
"Is set (A6507). Thereby, it is possible to shift to the big hit end processing. The length of the ending period is the sum of the ending time and the winning ball remaining ball processing time, and the ending effect is executed on the display device 41 and the like in this ending period.

After steps A6504 and A6507, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A6508). If the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A6508 is “Y”), the set processing number (“3” or “6”) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6509) and set. The saved time (interval time or ending time) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6510), and the winning prize remaining ball processing is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is not a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6508 is “N”), that is, when it is a big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, the processing number (“3” or “
6 ”) is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (A6511), and the set time (interval time or ending time) is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (A6512).
), The winning ball remaining ball processing is terminated.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process transition setting process (A6505) in the winning prize remaining ball process will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end process transition setting process.

First, the game control device 100 saves signals related to the end of the special winning opening (off data of the special electric player 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric player 2 operating signal) in the test signal output data area ( A6601), clears the big prize count area that holds the big prize count in the RWM (A6602), and clears the round area (A6603). Subsequently, the round number upper limit value area is cleared (A6604), the round number upper limit value information area is cleared (A6605), the big winning opening release information area is cleared (A6606), and the big hit middle processing control pointer area is cleared. (A6607).

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 big hit end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process.

First, the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as the process number to return to the special figure 1 normal process (A6701), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6702).
. Subsequently, the signal related to the end of the big hit (off data of 1 signal for the big hit and the off data of 3 signals for the big hit) is saved in the external information output data area (A6703), and a signal related to the start of the high probability & short time (output from the big hit) Are continuously output in the external information output data area (A6704).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6705). The signal related to the end of the jackpot is, for example, off data of the condition device operating signal, off data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, or off data of the special symbol per signal. Subsequently, a signal relating to the start of high probability & short time is saved in the test signal output data area (A6706). Here, the signals related to the start of high probability & short time are, for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal. . Thereafter, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6707).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number having a high probability in the game state display number area (
A6708), save the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A6709)
The turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A6710). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A6711), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A6712), and the special figure status is displayed. Clear the area (A6713)

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability flag in the special-purpose game mode flag area in order to set the high probability state (probability change state) after the big hit state is finished (A6714). In this embodiment, the jackpot symbol is only a probabilistic variable symbol, and after the jackpot is over, the state becomes a high probability state and also a time-short state. Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability variation number is saved in the high probability variation number region for holding the high probability variation number (A6715). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A6716).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6717), and ends the special figure 1 big hit end processing. This special figure 2 game wait time value is used to delay the fluctuation start determination of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 normal processing during the special figure 2 game processing) at the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12). Is set to Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8 m which is twice the interrupt cycle time.
sec (that is, 2 as the value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area).

If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 game process (A1310 in FIG. 12) that is executed immediately after the special figure 1 big hit end process is executed (A1310 in FIG. 12). 12 (A1311) in FIG. 12 starts the change start determination of the special figure 2 variable display game (starts within the current timer interrupt process), so the special figure 2 variable display game is more special than the special figure 2 variable display game.
There may be a problem that the variable display game starts first. In the special figure 1 big hit end process, the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set, so it remains 0. Therefore, the determination of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed in the next timer interruption process (the special figure 1 normal process during the special figure 1 game process).

The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to a time (8 msec) that is twice the interrupt period, but the special figure 2 game process immediately after the special figure 1 game process (starts within the current timer interrupt process). This is because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). The special figure 2 game processing timer in the next timer interrupt process
1 update (4 msec decrease) becomes 0 (the result of A3304 is “Y”), and the change start determination of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the special figure 2 normal process during the special figure 2 game process) is performed. . Thereby, in the next timer interruption process after the big hit state end by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the special figure 1 game process and the special figure). If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can start to fluctuate simultaneously. As described above, while the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is in the big hit state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is stopped at a symbol that is off (forcibly ended or originally has not changed).

If there is no problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started before the special figure 1 variable display game after the big hit state, the process of step A6717 is omitted. 2 It is not necessary to set the game wait time value.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 jackpot end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process.

First, the game control device 100 sets “0” as the process number to return to the special figure 2 normal process (A6801), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A6802).
. Subsequently, the signal related to the end of the big hit (off data of 1 signal of the big hit and the off data of 3 signals of the big hit) is saved in the external information output data area (A6803), and a signal related to the start of the high probability & short time (output from the big hit) Are continuously output in the external information output data area (A6804).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6805). The signal relating to the end of the jackpot is, for example, off data of the condition device operating signal, off data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, or off data of the special symbol 2 per signal. Subsequently, a signal relating to the start of high probability & short time is saved in the test signal output data area (A6806). Here, the signals related to the start of high probability & short time are, for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal. . Thereafter, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6807).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number having a high probability in the game state display number area (
A6808), save the number of the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A6809)
The turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A6810). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A6811), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A6812), and the special figure status is displayed. Clear the area (A6813)

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the high probability flag in the special-purpose game mode flag area in order to set the high probability state (probability change state) after the big hit state is finished (A6814). In this embodiment, the jackpot symbol is only a probabilistic variable symbol, and after the jackpot is over, the state becomes a high probability state and also a time-short state. Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability variation number is saved in the high probability variation number region for holding the high probability variation number (A6815). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A6816).

In the special figure 2 big hit end process, it is not necessary to provide the special figure 1 game wait time value. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer and special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, they remain 0, and in the next timer interrupt process, the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game starts. Is determined (within the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process), and if the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start to change simultaneously. This is because it can be done.

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, in the small hit fanfare process (A) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process
3215, A3318) will be described in detail. FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of small hitting fanfare processing.

First, the game control device 100 opens the big winning opening pattern by a small hit (Special Figure 1 small hit,
Branches according to the special figure 2 small hits 1, 2, 3) are performed (A6901). The opening pattern of the big winning opening by the small hit is the stop symbol number (A4312a, A4312b) or the small hit symbol (
A4313a and A4313b stop symbol pattern).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 1 small hit, the game control device 100 prepares the small hitting opening command for opening the lower big prize opening as an effect command (A6902), and executes the effect command setting process (A6902). A6903). Next, “8” is set as the process number (A69).
04), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6905), and the small winning opening time 1 (for example, 48 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area as the opening time of the big prize opening (A6906). . Subsequently, a signal related to the start of the small hitting operation (the special electric accessory 2 operating signal ON data) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6907), and the lower prize winning opening on data is stored in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6908).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is 1 in the special figure 2 small hits, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit opening releasing command for opening the lower big prize opening as an effect command (A6909), and executes an effect command setting process. (A6910). Next, “8” is set as the process number (A6
911), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6912), and the small hit opening time 2 (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area as the opening time of the big prize opening (A6913). . Subsequently, a signal relating to the start of the small hitting operation (the ON data of the special electric accessory 2 operating signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6914), and the lower prize opening on-data in the big prize opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6915).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is 2 in the special figure 2 small hits, the game control device 100 prepares a command for opening the small hit of the upper prize winning opening as an effect command (A6916), and executes the effect command setting process. (A6917). Next, “8” is set as the process number (A6
918), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (A6919), and the small hit release time 3 (for example, 1200 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area as the open time of the big prize opening (A6920). . Subsequently, a signal related to the start of the small hitting operation (the ON data of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6921), and the upper prize winning opening on data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6922).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is 3 in the special figure 2 small hits, the game control device 100 prepares the small hit opening releasing command for opening the upper prize winning opening as an effect command (A6923), and executes the effect command setting process. (A6924). Next, “8” is set as the process number (A6
925), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6926), and the small winning opening time 4 (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area as the opening time of the big prize opening (A6927). . Subsequently, a signal related to the start of the small hitting operation (ON data of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6928), and the upper prize winning port on data is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6929).

After step A6908, A6915, A6922, or A6929, the game control device 100 clears the big prize count area (A6930) and ends the small hit fanfare processing.

As described above, each small hit stop symbol number or the type of small hit release pattern corresponding to the small hit symbol (Special Figure 1 Small Hit, Special Figure 2 Small Per 1, 2, 3) Winning mouth (
The upper winning prize opening and the lower winning prize opening) and the opening time of the big winning opening (small hit opening time) are determined. In this embodiment, the control pointer is not set, and only the small hit opening pattern in which the big winning opening is opened only once. However, as in the case of the big winning, the control pointer is set to open / close the big winning opening. There may be a repeating small hit opening pattern. In addition, by setting “8” as the process number, it is possible to shift to the small hit middle processing after the small hit fanfare middle processing is completed.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, the small hit middle processing (A3216, A3 in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process)
319) will be described in detail. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hitting process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit end screen command as an effect command (
A7001), the effect command setting process is executed (A7002). Thereby, the effect control device 300 that has received the small hit end screen command can display the small hit end screen on the display device 41.

Next, the game control device 100 is configured to open a big winning opening by a small hit (Special Figure 1 small hit,
Branching according to the special figure 2 per small 1, 2, 3) is performed (A7003).

The game control device 100 sets “9” as the process number when the release pattern by the small hit is special figure 1 small hit (A7004), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A7005). The small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A7006). Subsequently, in order to turn off both the lower prize winning solenoid 38b and the upper prize winning solenoid 39b, the off data is saved in the large winning prize solenoid output data area (A7007), and the small hit / medium processing is terminated.

The game control device 100 sets “9” as the process number when the opening pattern by the small hit is 1 per special figure 2 small area (A7008), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A7009). ), The small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7010). Subsequently, in order to turn off both the lower prize winning solenoid 38b and the upper prize winning solenoid 39b, the off data is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area (A7011), and the small hit / medium processing is terminated.

The game control device 100 sets “9” as the processing number when the opening pattern by the small hit is special figure 2 small hit 2 or special figure 2 small hit 3 (A7012), in the special figure 2 game processing number area. The processing number is saved (A7013), and the small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (for example, 800 mse)
c) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7014). Subsequently, in order to turn off both the lower prize winning solenoid 38b and the upper prize winning solenoid 39b, the off data is saved in the large winning prize solenoid output data area (A7015), and the small hitting / medium processing is terminated.

By setting “9” as the process number, it is possible to move to the small hit remaining ball process after the small hit middle process is completed.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
Next, the small hit remaining ball processing (A3217, in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process)
A3320) will be described in detail. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit remaining sphere process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a small hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (A7101). Special figure 1 When it is a small hit of the variable display game (the result of A7101 is “Y”
), “10” is set as the process number (A7102), this process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (A7103), and the small hit ending time (for example, 100 msec)
Is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A7104).

When the game control device 100 is not the small hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A7101 is “N”), that is, when it is the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, the processing number is “10”.
Is set (A7105), and this process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (A71).
06), the small hit ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7107).

After steps A7104 and A7107, the game control apparatus 100 outputs test signal output data regarding the end of the small hitting operation (off data of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and off signal of the special electric accessory 2 operating signal). Save to the area (A7108), clear the winning prize count area (A7109), and end the small hit remaining ball processing. The process number is “10”.
By setting, after the end of the small hit remaining ball processing, it is possible to shift to the small hit end processing.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit end process.

The game control device 100 sets “0” as the process number in order to return to the special process of FIG.
A7201), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A7202). Subsequently, a signal related to the end of the small hit (off signal of the special symbol 1 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7203), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area. (A7204). Further, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7205), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7206).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit probability is in a high probability state (A72).
07). When it is in the high probability state (result of A7207 is “Y”), the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210). When not in the high probability state (result of A7207 is “N”), the signal related to the left hand instruction (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7208), and the game state display number 2 area The number in the left-handed state is saved (A7209), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210).

Here, for the same reason as Step A6717 in the special figure 1 big hit end process (FIG. 67),
8 msec (2 as the value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area), which is twice the interrupt cycle, is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area as the special figure 2 game wait time value. Thereby, in the next timer interruption process after the end of the small hit state by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the special figure 1 game process and the special figure). If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can start to fluctuate simultaneously.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hits end process.

The game control device 100 sets “0” as the process number in order to return to the special process in FIG.
A7301), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7302). Subsequently, a signal related to the end of the small hit (off signal of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7303), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area. (A7304), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower large winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (A7305). Further, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7306), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7307).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit probability is in a high probability state (A73).
08). When it is in a high probability state (result of A7308 is “Y”), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. When not in the high probability state (result of A7308 is “N”), a signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A730).
9) The number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A7310).
The small hit end processing is terminated.

For the same reason as the special figure 2 big hit end process (FIG. 68), it is not necessary to provide a game wait time value in the special figure 2 big hit end process.

[Design variation control processing]
Next, the symbol variation control process (A3220, Special Figure 1 game process and Special Figure 2 game process)
Details of A3323) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol variation control process. The symbol fluctuation control process is a process for controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2) and setting the display data of the special symbol.

In the game control device 100, first, of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the special figure fluctuation control flag related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the special figure 1) is a changing flag (a flag indicating that the change is in progress). Is checked (A7401). If it is changing, the changing flag is saved in the change control flag area (A5205a, A5205b).

Then, as a result of the check, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation control flag is a changing flag (A7402). If the special figure fluctuation control flag is a changing flag (A7402). The result is “Y”), and the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, special figure 1) is acquired (A7403). The address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined in the variation control table (A3219, A3322). further,
Of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the blinking control timer related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, special figure 1) is-
1 is updated (A7404), and it is determined whether or not the timer value is 0, that is, the time is up (A7405).

When the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (the result of A7405 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 acquires display data corresponding to the value of the target changing symbol number area (A7408).
). If the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (the result of A7405 is “Y”), the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (A7406). Furthermore, the special figure (for example, special figure 1) of control object among special figure 1 and special figure 2
) Update the changing symbol number for +1 and save it in the target changing symbol number area (A740)
7) Display data corresponding to the value of the changing symbol number area of interest is acquired (A7408).
Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6A, the variable display game that repeats the non-lighting symbol (fluctuating symbol number = 0) and the lighting symbol (fluctuating symbol number = 1) is a special symbol display to be controlled. (Special figure 1 display 51 or Special figure 2 display 52). The initial value of the changing symbol number is set to 0 indicating the non-lighting symbol in FIG. 5, for example (A5207a, A5207b).
.

On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not the changing flag, the game control apparatus 100 (A7
The result of 402 is “N”), and a symbol display table (for stoppage) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, special figure 1) is acquired (A7409). The address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined in the variation control table (A3219, A3322). Then, display data corresponding to the value (stop symbol number) of the target stop symbol area is acquired (A7410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

Thus, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6A, the special figure display (the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display) to be controlled among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. The special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number will be displayed on the device 52). In the stop symbol area, stop symbol numbers are saved corresponding to big hits, small hits, or out of order (A5324, A
5424).

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of segment LED editing processing. In the segment LED editing process, a round display unit 53 provided in the batch display device 50,
Special figure 1 hold indicator (memory display part) 54, first game state display part 55, second game state display part 5
Settings related to driving of segment LEDs constituting 6 and the like are made.

The game control device 100 first has a special figure 1 in which a display mode on the special figure 1 holding display 54 is defined.
A hold number table is set (A7501), display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold display (A7502).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 53 is defined (A7503), acquires display data corresponding to the round LED pointer, and stores it in the segment area of the round display unit 53. Save (A7504).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 55 is defined (A7505). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number in the game state display number area is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit 55 (A7506). Thereby, in the 1st game state display part 55, a high probability state or a low probability state can be displayed.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 56 is defined (A7507). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 in the game state display number 2 area is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second game state display unit 56 (A7508), and the segment LED editing process is terminated. This
In the second game state display unit 56, it can be displayed that the player is right-handed or left-handed.

In addition, when providing the 3rd game state display part 57 which shows that the variable display game is interrupted corresponding to the below-mentioned modification, the game control apparatus 100 displays on the 3rd game state display part 57. A game state display table in which a mode is defined is set, and display data corresponding to whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted is obtained to obtain a third game state display unit 5.
7 segment areas may be saved.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

The game control device 100 first turns on the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61), that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2). It is determined whether or not magnetism is detected (A
7601).

When the magnet sensor is on (the result of A7601 is “Y”),
That is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (A7602), and it is determined whether the timer has expired (A7603).

The game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (the result of A7603 is “Y”), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time ( A7604), the magnet fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (A7605).

Then, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a magnet fraud notification command as a production command (A7606), and prepares a magnet fraud occurrence flag indicating that a magnet fraud has occurred as a magnet fraud flag (A7606). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A7613). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period of time (for example, eight interruptions) set by the magnet fraud monitoring timer, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (the result of A7601 is “N”), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected. (A7608). If the magnet fraud notification timer that defines the magnet fraud notification time is not 0, -1 is updated (A7609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (A7610). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (
If the result of A7603 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A7609.

When the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A7610 is “N”), that is, when the time has not expired, the game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process.

In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A7610 is “Y”), that is, the time has expired or has already expired, If there is no fraudulent notification from the beginning,
A command for informing the magnet fraud is prepared as an effect command (A7611).

Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a magnet fraud release flag as a magnet fraud flag (
A7612), it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A7613).

When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A7613 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. on the other hand,
If the prepared magnet illegal flag does not match the value of the magnet illegal flag area (result of A7613 is “N”), the prepared magnet illegal flag is saved in the magnet illegal flag area (A7614).
), Execution command setting processing is executed (A7615). Thereafter, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[Board radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a procedure of board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) of the game board, and the start or end of fraud notification is set.

The game control device 100 first turns on the radio wave sensor 62 from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2) via the proximity I / F 121, that is, It is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (A77).
01). When the radio wave sensor is on (result of A7701 is “Y”), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area ( A7702).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a board radio wave fraud notification command as an effect command (A7703), and prepares a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag indicating that a board radio wave fraud has occurred as a board radio wave fraud flag (A7704). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (A7709). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines that the result of A7701 is “N” when the radio wave sensor is not on.
”), That is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, if the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is not 0, −1 is updated (A7705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (A7706). When the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A7706 is “N”)
That is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A7706 is “Y”), that is, the time has expired or has already expired, If there is no fraudulent notification from the beginning,
A command for terminating radio fraud notification is prepared as an effect command (A7707). Furthermore, a board radio wave fraud release flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (A7708), and it is determined whether the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (A7709).

When the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (the result of A7709 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the board radio wave fraud monitoring process.
If the values do not match (the result of A7709 is “N”), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (A7710), and the effect command setting process is executed (A7711). Thereafter, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1315) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of external information editing processing. In the external information editing process, a payout command transmission process (A1305), a winning opening switch / state monitoring process (A13)
08), based on the monitoring results in the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1313) and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1314), information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created. To set the output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (
A7801). When a glass frame open error is not occurring (A7801 result is “N”),
It is determined whether or not a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A7802).
. When the body frame opening error is not occurring (result of A7802 is “N”), the door / frame opening signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (A7803), and the security signal OFF data is stored in the external information output data. Save in the area (A7804).

The game control device 100, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (result of A7801 is “Y”), or when a body frame opening error is occurring (result of A7802 is “Y”),
The ON data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7805), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7806).

After steps A7804 and A7806, the game control apparatus 100 updates −1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A7807), and determines whether or not the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time is up). Determine (A7808). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating an initialization switch or the like (A1026 of main processing).
). The security signal control timer is counted from the RAM initialization time.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A7808 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not fraudulent radio waves are occurring (A7809). If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A7808 is “N”), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (A7810), and the process proceeds to step A7811. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

The gaming control device 100 has no frame radio wave fraud occurring (the result of A7809 is “N”)
Then, it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (A7811). If the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (the result of A7809 is "Y"), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (A7810), and the process proceeds to step A7811. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (the result of A7811 is “Y”), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7812), and the process proceeds to step A7813.

When the switch abnormality error is not occurring (result of A7811 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the magnet fraud is occurring (A7813). In addition, when a magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that a magnet fraud is occurring. If a magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A7813 is “N”), it is further determined whether a panel radio wave fraud is occurring (A7814). If the board radio fraud flag is saved in the board radio fraud flag area, it can be determined that the board radio fraud is occurring.

The game control apparatus 100 is in the case where the board radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A7814 is “N”).
Further, it is determined whether or not a big prize opening fraud is occurring (A7815). It should be noted that if the illegal prize-winning flag relating to the big prize opening (upper big prize opening or lower big prize opening) is saved in the illegal flag area, it can be determined that the big prize opening fraud is occurring. If the big prize opening fraud is not occurring (the result of A7815 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation (abnormal execution state of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is occurring ( A7816). If the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area, it can be determined that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring. Special figure 2 When abnormal fluctuation is not occurring (A7816 result is “N
”), The off-data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7).
817).

On the other hand, the game control apparatus 100 determines that the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A7813 is “Y
)), When a radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A7814 is “Y”), when a prize winning fraud is occurring (result of A7815 is “Y”), or when there is an abnormal fluctuation in special figure 2 If it has occurred (result of A7816 is “Y”), the security data ON data is saved in the external information output data area (A7818), and the gaming machine error status signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area. (A7819). The security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) by setting the security signal on data.

After steps A7817 and A7819, the game control apparatus 100 starts the start port 1 signal edit process (A7820), the start port 2 signal edit process (A7821), and the main prize ball signal edit process (A7).
822), the symbol determination number signal editing process (A7823) is executed, and the external information editing process is terminated. The start port 1 signal editing process is a process when the start port 1 switch 36a is input, and the start port 2 signal editing process is a process when the start port 2 switch 37a is input.

[Starter 1 signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port 1 signal editing process (A7020) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port 1 signal editing process.

First, the game control device 100 updates −1 if the start port 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (A7901). The minimum value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0.
Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (A7902).

When the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (A79)
02 is “Y”), it is determined whether the start port 1 signal output count is 0 or not (A7903).
). And when the number of times of starting port 1 signal output is not 0 (the result of A7903 is “N”),
The start port 1 signal output count is updated by -1 (A7904), and the initial value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is saved in the start port 1 signal output control timer area (A7905).

The initial value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is a time (for example, 128 ms) obtained by adding the ON state (for example, high level) time of the start port 1 signal and the OFF state (for example, low level) time.
ec).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the ON data for turning on the start port 1 signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A7907), and ends the start port 1 signal editing process.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the start port 1 signal output count is 0 (A7903).
Is "Y"), the off data for turning off the start port 1 signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A7908), and the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is not 0, the game control device 100 (
The result of A7902 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON period (A7906). Note that the fact that the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

When the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on period (the result of A7906 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 outputs on data for turning on the start port 1 signal to the external information of the RWM. The data is saved in the data area (A7907), and the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated.

In addition, when the start port 1 signal output control timer is not in the output on period (the result of A7906 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets off data for turning off the start port 1 signal for the external device. The data is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A7908), and the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated.

[Starter 2 signal editing process]
Next, the starting port 2 signal editing process (A7021) in the external information editing process is merely a replacement of “starting port 1” with “starting port 2” in the starting port 1 signal editing process. The drawing is omitted.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (A7022) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main prize ball signal editing process. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.

First, the game control device 100 updates −1 if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (A8001). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (A8002).

When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0, the game control device 100 (A8
The result of 002 is “Y”), and it is further determined whether or not the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (A8003).

Then, the game control apparatus 100 determines that the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (A80).
03 is “N”), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by −1 (A8004), and the main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is saved in the main prize ball signal output control timer area (A80).
05). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is an ON state of the main prize ball signal (for example,
The time (for example, the high level) and the off state (for example, the low level) are added (for example,
128 msec).

After that, the game control device 100 sends the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal to the RWM.
Are saved in the external information output data area (A8007), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated. If the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (the result of A8003 is “Y”),
Off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8008), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A8002 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period. Is determined (A8006). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (the result of A8006 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sends RWM on-data for turning on the main prize ball signal.
Are saved in the external information output data area (A8007). Further, when the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (result of A8006 is “N”), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is the external information output data of the RWM. The area is saved (A8008), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Design determination frequency signal editing process]
Next, details of the symbol determination number signal editing process (A7023) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol determination number signal editing process. The symbol determination number signal editing process is a process of outputting a symbol determination number signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is determined to the external device.

The game control device 100 first updates -1 if the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not 0 (A8101). The minimum value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0 (A8102).

When the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0, the game control device 100 (A
The result of 8102 is “Y”), and further, it is determined whether or not the symbol determination number signal output count is 0 (A8103).

And the game control apparatus 100 is (A8), when the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is not zero.
103 result is “N”), the symbol determination number signal output number is updated by −1 (A8104), and the symbol determination number signal output control timer initial value is saved in the symbol determination number signal output control timer (A
8105). The symbol determination count signal output control timer initial value is the ON state of the symbol determination count signal (
For example, it is a time (for example, 556 msec) obtained by adding a time (for example, 256 msec) of a high level and a time (for example, 300 msec) of an off state (for example, low level).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 sends RW data for turning on the symbol determination number signal to RW.
The data is saved in the external information output data area of M (A8107), and the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated. In addition, when the symbol determination number signal output number is 0 (the result of A8103 is “Y
”), The off data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8108), and the symbol determination frequency signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A8102 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output on period. Is determined (A8106). Note that the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output-on interval means that the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer has a predetermined time (for example, 300 m).
sec) or more.

When the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output on period (the result of A8106 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 outputs R data to turn on the symbol determination number signal.
Save in the external information output data area of the WM (A8107). Further, when the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not in the output on period (result of A8106 is “N”), the off data for turning off the symbol determination number signal for the external device is set as the external information output data of the RWM. The area is saved (A8108), and the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

[Variation of control of game control device]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the control (processing) of the game control device will be described. Configurations other than those described below are the same as the above-described control (processing) of the game control device.

In the above control processing (FIG. 53, FIG. 54, etc.), during the fluctuation of one special figure fluctuation display game (the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game), the other special figure fluctuation display game. When (Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Display Game or Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Display Game) is a hit result (big hit or small hit), one special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly terminated (forced termination) by the result of losing. However, as in the following modification, in this case, with respect to this one special figure variation display game, the measurement of the variation time by the timer is interrupted and the game result is derived (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number). It is also possible to postpone the special figure change display game that has been interrupted after the hit operation related to the other special figure change display game is ended (after the big hit state or the small hit state ends).

Even when the special figure variation display game is interrupted, the variation of the special symbol (identification information) is apparently continued in the display device 41 and the special figure fluctuation display unit (the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52). (Note that it is also possible to temporarily stop special symbol fluctuations during interruption). In the case where the fluctuation is apparently continued, it can be said that, in another concept, the fluctuation time is extended with respect to one special figure by the time of the hit operation (the time of the big hit state or the small hit state) with respect to the other special figure. .

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing (Modification)]
A modification of the above-described special figure 1 game process (A1310) will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process according to the modification. FIG. 82 is obtained by adding the process of step S8200 to FIG. Steps A3201 to A3220 in FIG.
The processing up to this point is the same as that shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first displays the special figure 1 indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended.
It is determined whether or not a game interruption flag is set (S8200). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8200 is “N”), the processing from step A3201 to A3220 is executed.

On the other hand, the game control apparatus 100, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (S82)
After the result of 00 is “Y”), after preparing the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 without performing the processing of steps A3201 to A3218 (A3219),
The symbol variation control process related to the special figure 1 display 51 is executed (A3220), and the special figure 1 game process is terminated. In this way, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted, the time keeping (update) of the fluctuation time timer (the special figure 1 game processing timer) for measuring the fluctuation time is stopped. In addition,
By the symbol fluctuation control process, the special symbol fluctuation itself is apparently continued in the special figure 1 display 51.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing (Modification)]
A modification of the above-described special figure 2 game process (A1311) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 game process according to the modification. FIG. 83 is obtained by adding the process of step S8300 to FIG. Steps A3301 to A3323 in FIG.
The processing up to this point is the same as that shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first displays the special figure 2 indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended.
It is determined whether or not a game interruption flag is set (S8300). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8300 is "N"), the processing from step A3301 to A3323 is executed.

On the other hand, the game control apparatus 100, when the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (S83)
00 is "Y"), and after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the special figure 2 display 52 without performing the processing of steps A3301 to A3321 (A3322),
The symbol variation control process related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is executed (A3323), and the special figure 2 game process is terminated. In this way, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted, the time keeping (update) of the fluctuation time timer (the special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the fluctuation time is stopped. In addition,
By the symbol variation control process, the special symbol variation itself is apparently continued in the special symbol 2 display 52.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating Process (Modification)]
A modification of the special figure 1 changing process (A3209) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 changing process according to the modification.
84 deletes the processing of steps A5311 to A5319 of FIG.
11 to S8416 are added. Steps A5301 to A5 in FIG.
310 and steps A5320 to A5325 are the same as those in FIG.

The game control device 100 is in a case where the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of place (in the case of big hit or small hit) and the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) (A5).
The result of 309 is “N” and the result of A5310 is “Y”), steps S8411 to S84.
By the process of 16, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted. When the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of date and when the special figure 2 is changing (S8).
411). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of place (the result of S8411 is “Y”)
), The remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec (the special figure 2 game processing timer = 4 ms)
ec) is determined (S8412). That is, based on the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as the special figure 1 variable display game. To do.

When the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec, the game control device 100 (
The result of S8412 is “Y”), and the special figure 2 game processing timer immediately after the current special figure 1 game process (started within the current timer interrupt process) is updated by −1 (decrease by 4 msec) ) And becomes 0, and the special figure 2 variable display game can be ended with the result of losing. Therefore, in this case, since it is not necessary to interrupt the special figure 2 variable display game, the process proceeds to step A5324.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of play (S8411)
Is “N”), or when the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 msec (
The result of S8412 is “N”), and a special figure 2 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted is set (S8413). The special figure 2 game interruption flag is used for the determination in step S8300 described above. Subsequently, a decoration special figure 2 interruption command for instructing interruption of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (S8414), and an effect command setting process is executed (S8415). Effect control device 3 that has received the decoration special figure 2 interruption command
00 can set an effect for interrupting the decorative special figure 2 variable display game.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure 2 game processing timer by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) (S8416). This is because the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (S8413),
Since the special figure 2 game process timer is not updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) in the special figure 2 game process immediately after the special figure 1 game process this time, the special figure 2 game process timer is set to -1 instead.
It is updated (decrease by 4 msec). As a result, when the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted, the special figure 2 game processing timer can be prevented from being excessively increased by 4 msec (see FIG. 105).

After step S8416, the game control apparatus 100 performs step A532 as in FIG.
Processing from 0 to A5325 is executed. Note that, in the special figure 1 changing process according to the modified example, unlike FIG. 53, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is not executed.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating Process (Modification)]
A modified example of the special figure 2 changing process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process according to the modification.
FIG. 85 deletes the processing of steps A5411 to A5419 in FIG.
11 to S8513 are added. Steps A5401 to A5 in FIG.
The processing of 410 and steps A5420 to A5425 is the same as that in FIG.

The game control apparatus 100 is in a case where the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of place (in the case of big hit or small hit) and the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A5).
The result of 409 is “N” and the result of A5410 is “Y”).
By the process of 13, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted. When the special figure 2 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted.

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of sync and the special figure 1 is changing, the game control device 100 displays a special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. Set (S8511). The special figure 1 game interruption flag indicates the above-described step S8200.
Used to determine Subsequently, a decoration special figure 1 interruption command for instructing interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (S8512), and an effect command setting process is executed (S8513). Receiving the decoration special figure 1 interruption command, the effect control device 300 can set an effect for interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game.

After step S8513, the game control apparatus 100 performs step A542 as in FIG.
Processing from 0 to A5325 is executed. In the special figure 2 changing process according to the modification, unlike FIG. 54, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is not executed.

[Special Figure 1 Big Hit End Processing (Modification)]
A modification of the special figure 1 big hit end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process according to the modification. FIG. 86 is obtained by adding steps S8617 to S8621 to FIG. The processing from step A6701 to A6716 in FIG. 86 is the same as that in FIG.

After step A6716, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (S8617). When special figure 2 game interruption flag is set,
It can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted. When the special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended (the result of S8617 is “N”), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (S8620). The 2-game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (S8621), and the special figure 1 big hit end process is terminated.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (the result of S8617 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 produces a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing to resume the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. It prepares as a command (S8618) and performs an effect command setting process (S86).
19). The presentation control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 2 variable display game. Thereafter, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (S8620), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8621). Then, the special figure 1 big hit end processing is ended.

By clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the timing (update) of the fluctuation time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is resumed (S
The result of 8300 is “N”). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the suspended special figure 2 variable display game is resumed.

Note that the process of step S8621 is the same process as step A6717 of FIG. 67, and the special figure 2 game wait time value is the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game after the big hit state is ended by the special figure 1 variable display game. (Resume) is set to delay the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and is 8 msec, which is twice the interrupt cycle. As a result, the timer interrupt process after the end of the big hit state by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game can restart the special figure 2 fluctuation display game simultaneously with the start of the new special figure 1 fluctuation display game. If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 variable display game is started (restarted) in the current timer interrupt process before the special figure 1 variable display game. After the big hit,
If there is no problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started (restarted) before the special figure 1 variable display game, the process of step A8621 is omitted, and the special figure 2 game weight is saved. It is not necessary to set the time value.

Also, depending on the special figure 2 game wait time value, the change start determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is made at the next timer interrupt processing, but the decorative special figure 2 restart command is set and transmitted first. This is because the processing cycle of the production control device 300 is longer than that of the game control device 100.
This is because the interrupt time (4 msec) can be absorbed.

[Special Figure 2 Big Hit End Processing (Modification)]
A modified example of the special figure 2 jackpot end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot end process according to the modification. FIG. 87 is obtained by adding steps S8717 to S8720 to FIG. The processing from step A6801 to A6816 in FIG. 87 is the same as that in FIG.

After step A6816, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (S8717). When special game 1 game interruption flag is set,
It can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (the result of S8717 is “N”), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (S8720). End the big hit end process.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (the result of S8717 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 produces a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game. A command is prepared (S8718), and a production command setting process is executed (S87).
19). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variable display game. Thereafter, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (S8720), and the special figure 2 big hit ending process is terminated.

By clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the timing (update) of the fluctuation time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is resumed (S
The result of 8300 is “N”). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the suspended special figure 2 variable display game is resumed.

In the special figure 2 big hit end process, the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set.
This is because, even if there is no special figure 2 game wait time value, both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be started (restarted) within the next timer interruption process (FIG. 12).

[Special Figure 1 Small Hit End Processing (Modification)]
Next, a modified example of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hits end process according to the modification. FIG. 88 is obtained by adding steps S8810 to S8814 to FIG. The processing from step A7201 to A7209 in FIG. 72 is the same as that in FIG.

The game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A7207 is “Y”), or
After step A7209, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (S8).
810). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of S8810 is “N”), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8813), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 msec) is displayed. The process is saved in the processing timer area (S8814), and the special figure 1 small hit end processing is ended.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (the result of S8810 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 produces a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing to restart the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. It prepares as a command (S8811) and performs an effect command setting process (S88).
12). The presentation control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 2 variable display game. After that, clear the special figure 2 game interruption flag area (S
8813), the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (S8814), and the special figure 1 small hit end process is terminated. Thus, in the next timer interruption process after the end of the small hit state by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be resumed simultaneously with the start of a new special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Note that the process of step S8814 is the same process as step A7210 of FIG. Further, by clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted is resumed.

[Special Figure 2 Small Hit End Processing (Modification)]
Next, a modified example of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hits end process according to the modification. FIG. 89 is obtained by adding the processing of steps S8911 to S8814 to FIG. The processing from step A7301 to A7210 in FIG. 73 is the same as that in FIG.

The game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A7308 is “Y”), or
After step A7310, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (S8).
911). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of S8911 is “N”), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (the result of S8911 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares the decoration special figure 1 restart command as an effect command (S8912), and executes the effect command setting process. (S8913). Receiving the decoration special figure 1 restart command, the effect control device 300 can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 2 variable display game. After that, Special Figure 2
The game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. Note that by clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the special figure 1 variable display game that has been interrupted can be resumed.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production | presentation control apparatus 300 performs with the program for production control is demonstrated. For convenience of explanation, the control of the production control device 300 will be described as corresponding to the above-described modified example of the control of the game control device 100 (configuration that resumes the suspended special figure variation display game). In the case of a basic configuration that forcibly terminates the special figure variation display game (configuration that is not a modified example), the processing related to the suspension and resumption of the special figure variation display game may be omitted.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. Fig. 90
These are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the step code (number) is represented as “B ***”.

When the execution of the main process is started, the production control device 300 first prohibits interruption (
B1001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B1002, BDP3).
1003), interrupt is permitted (B1004). When the interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
A command reception interrupt process for receiving a command transmitted from 00 is enabled.

Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 and the like (B1005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B1006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B1007).

Subsequently, the production control device 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B1).
008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initial setting (B1002), and the CPU 311
Monitor whether is working properly. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B1009). continue,
Hall / player setting mode processing is performed to accept operations such as LED and liquid crystal brightness and volume changes by the player (B1011). And the random number update process for updating random numbers, such as production random numbers, is performed (B1011), the received command received from the game control apparatus 100 is analyzed, and the corresponding received command check process is performed (B1012). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect display editing processing for updating various data in accordance with the content displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or setting a drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. (B1013). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing command preparation end setting is executed by completing the drawing preparation to the display frame buffer (B10).
14).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is a frame switching timing (B
1015). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B1015 is “N”), the processing of B1015 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B1015 is “Y”), the display to the display device 41 is performed. Instructs screen drawing (B1
016). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when a periodic V blank (image update) every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame period) is executed twice, the frame is switched. . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 seconds.

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B1017).

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) made of LEDs or the like (B1018). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B1019). In the movable body control process, for example, a solenoid is driven to execute an accessory action effect.

And the production | presentation control apparatus 300 returns to the process of B1008, after finishing the process of B1019 mentioned above. Thereafter, the processing from B1008 to B1019 is repeated.

[Received command check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, details of the received command check process (B1012) in the main process (FIG. 90) described above will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). When the command reception number is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control apparatus 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to be analyzed, and the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 has a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value for the number of received commands (B1103
) The content of the received command buffer in the RAM is copied to the command area for analysis (B11).
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before the contents in the buffer are copied to the command area. Even if a new command is received during copying, the data is not overwritten.

Then, the production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1 only) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer stores the received command 32.
It is configured to store up to. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command reading indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106). If the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N ]), The process from step B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100, the contents of the received command are stored in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, analysis of received commands is performed separately in a command area for analysis. When the contents of the received command are copied to the analysis command area, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of command reception by always ensuring a free area without directly analyzing in the reception command buffer.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300, when copying is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y
], The received command contents in the command area for analysis are loaded (B1107), and a received command analysis process for analyzing the contents is executed (B1108). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110). If the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is “N”), step The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 91) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 shows the production control device 30.
7 is a flowchart showing a procedure of received command analysis processing executed by 0;

The effect control apparatus 300 first separates the received command as the MODE part and the lower byte as the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 are the MODE section (MODE command) and A
It is composed of a CTION part (ACTION command) and is normally transmitted continuously from the MODE part indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower order of the received command is M
The ODE section and the ACTION section are configured in this order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion is in the normal range (B12).
02). That is, it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicating the type of command is a value that can be taken (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE portion is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION portion is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the contents of the command (specific production instruction or the like) (value assigned as the command specification indicating the contents). If the ACTION part is in the normal range (B1203
Is “Y”), it is further determined whether or not the ACTION section for the MODE section is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is “Y”), command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variation command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decorative special symbol, and includes variation commands (A5014 and A5015 in FIG. 50). And MO
If the DE part represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a variable command, the effect control device 300 (B12
Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the hit command (B
1207). The hit command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit or a small hit effect (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.), for example, a hit symbol command, a round command, a small hit open command, etc. . If the MODE portion represents a hit command (the result of B1207 is “Y”), the hit command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

The production control device 300 (B12) when the MODE portion does not represent a hit command.
Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion is within the design command range (B).
1209). Note that the symbol-related commands include a decoration special figure 1 command (A4316a in FIG. 43A) and a decoration special figure 2 command (A4316b in FIG. 43B) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. When the MODE part represents a symbol-type command (the result of B1209 is “Y”),
The symbol system command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

The production control device 300 (B12) when the MODE unit does not represent a symbol-type command.
The result of 09 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is in the range of the single-shot command (B
1211). If the MODE portion represents a single command (result of B1211 is “Y”), single command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command, the effect control device 300 (B12
11 is “N”), it is then determined whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the pre-read symbol system command (B1213). The prefetch symbol command includes the above-described prefetch stop symbol command (FIG. 31).
A3111). If the MODE part represents a pre-read symbol system command (B
The result of 1213 is “Y”), the pre-read symbol command processing is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

The production control device 300 (in the case where the MODE unit does not represent the pre-read symbol system command (
Next, the result of B1213 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (B1215). The prefetch variation command includes the above-described prefetch variation pattern command (A3115 in FIG. 31). If the MODE portion represents a prefetch fluctuation command (the result of B1215 is “Y”), prefetch fluctuation command processing is executed (B1216).
), The received command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch fluctuation command (result of B1215 is “N”), the production control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Further, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), when the ACTION part is not in the normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or AC for the MODE part
Even when the TION part is not a correct combination (the result of B1204 is “N”), the received command analysis process ends.

[Single command processing]
Next, the details of the single command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 92) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of the single command processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. 93B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second half of the single command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE portion represents a model designation command (the result of B1301 is “Y”), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302), the single command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a model designation command, the production control device 300 (B1
The result of 301 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE portion represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). When the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (
The result of B1303 is “Y”), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization and the like is executed (B1304), and the single command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit represents a command at the time of power failure recovery. (B1305). If the MODE unit represents a command for restoration from a power failure (the result of B1305 is “Y”), a power failure restoration setting process is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command process is terminated. In addition, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted (when there is a special figure game interruption flag backed up in the RWM), the command at the time of power failure recovery includes a special figure. A suspended command (suspending command) indicating that the 1-variable display game is suspended or that the special figure 2-variable display game is suspended is included.

When the MODE unit does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery (
The result of B1305 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). When the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B1
The result of 307 is “Y”), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a customer waiting demo command, the production control device 300 (B
The result of 1307 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a decoration special figure 1 hold number command (B1309). If the MODE part represents a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is “Y”), a special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310).
End single-shot command processing.

When the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 then determines whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. Is determined (B1311). If the MODE part represents a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is “Y”), a special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B131).
2) End single-shot command processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is the game control device 100.
The processing in steps B1311, B1312 may be omitted. However, when the special figure 2 start display memory is generated, the special figure 2 variable display game does not start immediately (for example, the winning to the second start winning opening 37 is not invalidated during the small hit, etc.) In the case of the special figure start port 2 switch process (FIG. 30), the special figure hold information determination process (prefetching process, pre-determination process) is performed, and the game control device 100 sends a special figure 2 hold number command. May be transmitted.

When the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part represents a probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a probability information command, the production control device 300 (B1
Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion represents an error / invalid command (B1315). As error / unauthorized commands, for example, fraud occurrence command (A2108), fraud cancellation command (A2116), special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command (A2414), special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command (A2418), state off Command (A2
504) and a state on command (A2507). If the MODE part represents an error / unauthorized command (the result of B1315 is “Y”), an error / unauthorization setting process is executed to notify or cancel the error or the unauthorized (B1316). End single-shot command processing.

When the MODE unit does not represent an error / unauthorized command (result of B1315 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit represents a command for effect mode switching. Determination is made (B1317). If the MODE section represents a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is “Y”), the effect mode switching setting process is executed (B1).
318), the single command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE unit represents a command for symbol stop. (B1319). Note that the symbols stop command includes a decorative special figure 1 stop command and a decorative special figure 2 stop command. If the MODE portion represents a symbol stop command (result of B1319 is “Y”), it is determined whether the command is a normal command (B1320). If the command is not normal (the result of B1320 is “N”), the single command processing is terminated.

When the command is a normal command (the result of B1320 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs stop setting for stopping the corresponding special figure (decorative special figure 1 or decorative special figure 2) (B132).
1). When all the special symbols (identification information) in the plurality of variable display areas of the display device 41 are stopped, the gaming state flag is set to the normal state (B1322), and the single command processing is terminated. The game state flag is a flag that can indicate other states such as changing, big hit, and small hit.

The production control device 300 (when the MODE section does not represent a symbol stop command)
The result of B1319 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE portion represents a command for interrupting fluctuation (B1323). Note that the commands for interrupting the variation are the above-described decorative special figure 1 interruption command (S8512 in FIG. 85) and the decorative special figure 2 interruption command (S8414 in FIG. 84). When the MODE part represents a command for interrupting the change (the result of B1323 is “Y”).
Then, the change interruption setting process is executed (B1324), and the single command processing is terminated.

The production control device 300 (when the MODE section does not represent a command for interrupting the change)
The result of B1323 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE portion represents a command for resuming fluctuation (B1325). Note that the commands for resuming the fluctuation are the above-described decorative special figure 1 restart command (S8718 in FIG. 87) and the decorative special figure 2 restart command (S8618 in FIG. 86). When the MODE part represents a command for interrupting fluctuation (result of B1325 is “Y”).
Then, the change restart setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

Even if the change interruption command is not received, if a hit system command related to the effect (big hit or small win) of one of the special figure change display games of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is received, The effect control device 300 may automatically determine whether or not the other decoration special figure variation display game is being executed, and perform the variation interruption setting process and the subsequent variation resumption setting process.

[Change interruption setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the details of the change interruption setting process (B1324) in the single-shot command process (FIG. 93) described above will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the change interruption setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received change interruption command is a normal command (B1401). If the command is not normal (the result of B1401 is “N
]), The change interruption setting process is terminated. If the command is normal (the result of B1401 is “
Y "), it is determined whether or not the command is received when the power is turned on (B1402). If the command is received when the power is turned on (result of B1402 is “Y”), the received command (
In response to the decorative special figure 1 interruption command or the decorative special figure 2 interruption command), a decorative special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) interrupting flag indicating that the decorative special figure variation display game is being interrupted is displayed. Set (B1403).

When the command is not received when the power is turned on (result of B1402 is “N”), the effect control device 300 is changing the symbol (decoration special figure 1 or special ornament figure 2) to be interrupted. It is determined whether or not the change display game of the symbol to be interrupted is being executed (B1404). If the target symbol is not changing (the result of B1404 is “N”), the change interruption setting process is terminated. When the target symbol is changing (the result of B1404 is “Y”)
Then, it is determined whether or not the received variable interruption command is a decoration special figure 1 interruption command (B
1405).

When the received change interruption command is the decoration special figure 1 interruption command (the result of B1405 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 sets the interruption fluctuation display of the decoration special figure 1 (B14).
06). For example, on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, if the variable display of the decorative special figure 1 is displayed large at the center, the variable display for interruption is set so that it moves to the corner and is displayed in a reduced size. Alternatively, a variable display for interruption may be set to display in a state of higher transparency than usual. Subsequently, an interrupting flag of the decorative special figure 1 indicating that the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted is set in the RAM or the like (B1407). And it is determined whether it is a low probability state (B1408).

If the result control device 300 is in the low probability state (the result of B1408 is “Y”), it determines whether or not the result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (B1409). Decoration special figure 2
When the result of the variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B1409 is “N”), the display device 41
In order to suggest interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game, etc., display setting of the effect for interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is executed (B1410), and the variable interruption setting process is ended.

When the production control device 300 is not in the low probability state (result of B1408 is “N”), that is,
In the high probability state, the effect of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41. Therefore, the display of the effect for interrupting the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is not set and the variable interruption is performed. The setting process ends. Also, if the result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (B1
The result of 409 is “Y”), and the big hit effect of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41, so the display setting of the interruption special effect of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is not performed. The change interruption setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 determines that if the received variable interruption command is not the decoration special figure 1 interruption command (result of B1405 is “N”), that is, if it is a decoration special figure 2 interruption command, the decoration special figure 2 The interruption variation display is set (B1411). For example, on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, the variation display of the decorative special figure 2 is greatly enlarged (main display,
If it is normal display), you may set a variable display for interruption that moves to the corner and displays it in a reduced size, or you can set a variable display for interruption that displays in a state of higher transparency than normal. Good. Subsequently, the suspension flag of the decoration special figure 2 indicating that the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted is set in the RAM or the like (B1412). And it is determined whether it is a low probability state (B1413).

The production control device 300 is not in the low probability state (the result of B1413 is “N”), that is,
In the case of a high probability state, it is determined whether or not the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (
B1414). If the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B1414 is “N”), the display device 41 or the like suggests that the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted. The display setting of the effect for interruption is executed (B1415), and the variation interruption setting process is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 is in a low probability state (the result of B1413 is “Y”), the effect of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41. The display setting of the display game interruption effect is not performed, and the variation interruption setting process is terminated. Further, when the result of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of B1414 is “Y”), the display device 41 preferentially displays the big hit effect of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game. The display of the effect for interruption of the special figure 2 variable display game is not performed, and the variable interruption setting process is terminated.

[Variation restart setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the details of the change restart setting process (B1326) in the single-shot command process (FIG. 93) described above will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the change restart setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control apparatus 300 first determines whether or not the received command for resuming fluctuation is a normal command (B1501). If the command is not normal (the result of B1501 is “N
”), The variable restart setting process is terminated. When the command is normal (the result of B1501 is “
Y "), it is determined whether or not the received command for resuming variation is a decorative special figure 1 resuming command (B1502).

When the received command for resuming fluctuation is a decoration special figure 1 restart command (result of B1502 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 changes the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation based on the suspension flag of the decoration special figure 1. It is determined whether or not the display game is interrupted (B1503). If the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of B1503 is “N”), the variable restart setting process is terminated.

When the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (the result of B1503 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 clears the interrupting flag of the decorative special figure 1 (B1504). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B150).
5). The power failure recovery display is a display that suggests that the power failure has been recovered and that processing after the power failure recovery is being performed. When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B1505 is “Y”), the change of the recovery special figure 1 for recovery according to the probability state (restarting the recovery special figure 1 variable display game for recovery) is set. (B1506). When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B1505 is “
N "), a restart (not for recovery) of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game according to the probability state is set (B1507).

On the other hand, if the received command for resuming variation is not the decoration special figure 1 restart command (the result of B1502 is “N”), that is, the effect control apparatus 300 is a decoration special figure 2 restart command, the decoration special figure 2 Based on the interrupting flag, it is determined whether or not the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (B1508). Decoration special figure 2 When the variable display game is not suspended (B150
8 is “N”), the change restart setting process is terminated.

When the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is suspended (the result of B1508 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 clears the suspension flag of the decoration special figure 2 (B1509). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B151).
0). When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B1510 is “Y”), the change of the recovery decoration special figure 2 according to the probability state is resumed (the recovery special figure 2 variable display game is resumed). (B1511). When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B1510 is “N”), the restart of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game according to the probability state (not for recovery) is set (B151).
2).

Regarding the processing of Steps B1506, B1507, B1511, and B1512, there is a possibility that the probability state has changed between when the decoration special figure variation display game is interrupted and when it is resumed. Therefore, at the time of resumption, the display mode of the symbol differs depending on whether or not the target symbol is in a probability state of preferential display. For example, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted during the low probability, the reduced symbol of the special figure 1 continues to fluctuate in the corner of the display device 41.
Is resumed in a state where priority display is largely performed in the center of the display device 41. If it is a high probability / short time state at the time of resumption, it resumes with a reduced symbol (reduced display).

[Pre-reading design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, details of the pre-read symbol system command process (B1214) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 92) described above will be described. FIG. 96 shows the production control device 30.
10 is a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetch symbol system command processing executed by 0;

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest hold information is information on special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the decoration special figure hold number command received latest is the decoration special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether it is a command (B1601). When the latest reserved information is information on special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “Y”), a prefetch symbol type command (prefetch stop symbol command) is displayed in the special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure ones on hold. Save (B1602).

In the production control device 300, when the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “N”), that is, the latest special figure hold number command received is the special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the pre-read symbol system command (pre-read stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 pre-read symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number (B1603).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is the game control device 1.
Since it is not transmitted from 00, the process of step B1603 is basically not executed. However, when the special figure 2 start display memory is generated, the special figure 2 variable display game does not start immediately (for example, the winning to the second start winning opening 37 is not invalidated during the small hit, etc.) in case of,
The game control device 100 transmits a decoration special figure 2 hold number command, and step B16.
The process 03 may be executed.

The effects control device 300 sets a prefetch fluctuation command reception waiting flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a prefetch fluctuation command after steps B1602 and B1603 (B160).
4). This is because the prefetch symbol command and the prefetch variation command are set, so that the game controller 100 transmits the prefetch variation command following the prefetch symbol command. Thereafter, the look-ahead design command processing is terminated.

[Read-ahead variation command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the details of the prefetch fluctuation command process (B1215) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 97 shows the production control device 30.
10 is a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetch fluctuation command processing executed by 0;

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetch fluctuation command (B1701). When the above-mentioned prefetch fluctuation system command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the prefetch fluctuation system command is waiting to be received. If it is not waiting to receive the prefetch fluctuation command (the result of B1701 is “N”), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. When waiting to receive a prefetch fluctuation command (result of B1701 is “
Y "), the prefetch fluctuation command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the production control device 300 (sub-board) displays the latest reserved information (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2).
A pre-reading variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of pending items is set (B1703), and an in-sub-prefetching variation command MODE portion is obtained corresponding to the MODE portion of the prefetching variation command (
B1704). Next, a pre-reading variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-prefetching variation command ACT corresponding to the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the prefetch variation-related command is set.
Part is acquired (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE part and ACT part) are other than 0 (B1707).
. If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. MODE section after conversion, A
When both CT parts are other than 0 (result of B1707 is “Y”), the converted MODE part and A
The converted command composed of the CT section is saved in the latest hold information and the prefetch fluctuation command area (Special Figure 1 prefetch fluctuation command area or Special Figure 2 prefetch fluctuation command area) corresponding to the number of holds (B1708). Then, prefetch command consistency check processing is executed (B170).
9) It is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1710).
).

Note that the time of the first half change corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of holds when the hold starts the variable display game. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, the first half of the change will be long, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, the first half of the change will be short. Therefore, the MODE part of the received prefetch fluctuation command is converted into the sub-internal prefetch fluctuation command MODE part so that the internal command of the effect control apparatus 300 can be handled in the same manner even if the time value of the first half fluctuation changes.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half fluctuation corresponding to the sub-in-prefetch fluctuation command ACT part does not depend on the number of holds. However, because there are different types of reach in the same system,
The effect control device 30 is not converted without converting the ACT part (the value of the second half fluctuation) of the prefetch fluctuation command.
If 0 is used as it is, the number increases and it becomes difficult to check. For example, for normal reach,
There are types such as a normal reach-1 stop failure and a normal reach + 1 stop failure.
Therefore, by converting the ACT unit indicating the reach of the same system to the same sub-subread pre-reading variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced, and the load of check processing such as pre-read command consistency check processing is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300, when at least one of the converted MODE part and the ACT part (that is, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE part and the ACT part) is 0 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or When the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (B171
If the result of 0 is “N”), it is determined that there is an abnormality in the converted command, and the prefetching variation command processing is terminated.

When the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B
If the result of 1710 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the most recently generated latest hold is out of date (B1711). The production control device 300 determines that the latest hold is successful (the result of B1711 is “
N "), and calculates the total time until the latest pending special-figure display game is ended (B1)
712). The total time includes the display time of the stop symbol.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the other decoration special figure variation display game is to be interrupted at the end of the variation of the latest reserved special figure variation display game (B1713). If the latest hold is the special figure 1 hold, the other decorative special figure variation display game is a decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Here, for example, after the calculated total time, when the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game is not executed or when the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game is out of fluctuation, the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. It is determined not to be interrupted.

The production control device 300 suspends the other decoration special figure variation display game (
If the result of B1713 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not there is a plan to execute a pre-reading effect for the suspended suspension (B1714). The suspended suspension is a suspension corresponding to the decorative special figure variation display game to be suspended. In addition, the fact that the execution is scheduled includes that a pre-reading effect is being executed. If there is a plan to execute a prefetch effect for the suspended suspension (the result of B1714 is “Y”), it is determined whether the prefetched effect of suspended suspension is a pending change notice (B1715).

The production control device 300, when the pre-read production of the suspended hold is not a pending change notice (B1715)
Is “N”), it is determined whether or not the replacement of the effect for the pre-reading effect of suspension suspension is in time (B1716). If it is impossible to forcibly end the pre-reading production, it is determined that the production replacement is not in time (no replacement is performed). If the effect replacement is in time (the result of B1716 is “Y”), the converted command is saved in the pre-reading variable command area corresponding to the latest hold information and the number of holds so that the effect is replaced (B1717).
.

The production control device 300, when the latest hold is out of place (the result of B1711 is “Y”),
When the other decoration special figure fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of B1713 is “
N ”), when there is no plan to execute a pre-reading effect for suspension suspension (the result of B1714 is“ N ”)
) If the pre-reading effect of the suspended suspension is a pending change notice (the result of B1715 is “Y”), if the replacement of the effect is not in time (the result of B1716 is “N”), the effect is not replaced and the process directly in Transition to processing.

Next, the production control device 300 loads the prefetch target hold information (latest hold information) from the prefetch change command area (B1718), and executes prefetch lottery processing related to the latest hold prefetch effect (B1719). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest pending pre-reading notice effect is generated (B1720). When the latest pending pre-reading notice effect occurs (result of B1720 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect to be generated is an effect that immediately starts (B
1721). An effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice. When the prefetching notice effect to be generated is an effect that immediately starts (result of B1721 is “Y”), a display corresponding to the selected prefetching effect is set (B1722). Then, the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the effect control apparatus 300 does not generate the latest pre-reading notice effect (B172).
0 result is “N”), or the pre-reading notice effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (
The result of B1721 is “N”). The prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the special figure start port 2 switch process does not perform the special figure hold information determination process (prefetching process, pre-determination process), so the special figure 2 start memory (special figure 2 hold) On the other hand, the prefetch symbol command (prefetch stop symbol command) and the prefetch variation command (prefetch variation pattern command) are not transmitted from the game control device 100. For this reason, the processing from step B1715 to B1717 is not basically executed. However, when the special figure 2 start display memory is generated, the special figure 2 variable display game does not start immediately (for example, the winning to the second start winning opening 37 is not invalidated during the small hit, etc.) In the case), the pre-reading design command and the pre-reading variation command for the special figure 2 start memory (special figure 2 hold) are sent to the game control device
It is also possible to transmit from 00 and execute the processing of steps B1711 to B1717.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the details of the symbol system command process (B1210) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 receives the received symbol-type command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2
The special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of (command) is set (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. And the MODE part and ACTION part (ACT
Part) is set and the symbol type is saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180).
2). Here, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, since the symbol distribution ratio changes, a symbol type is set using a table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol types are the above-mentioned outlier symbol, 2R probability variation symbol, 4R probability variation symbol, 8R probability variation symbol, and 16R probability variation symbol.

[Variable command processing]
Next, details of the variable command process (B1206) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 92) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control apparatus 300 receives the special map type (special map 1) of the received variable command (variable command).
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2) is unconfirmed (B1901). When the special figure type is unconfirmed (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is “N”), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether or not the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the term “inconsistency” means that there is a contradiction in performing an effect, for example, when a symbol-type command with a probabilistic variation is received even though a variation-type command is received. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is “Y”),
The variable command processing is terminated.

When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (result of B1903 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1).
904), the changing effect setting process for setting the changing effect is executed (B1905). In addition,
There are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, a special state change is set to the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-read effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907).

[Variation production setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the details of the changing effect setting process (B1905) in the above-described changing command process (FIG. 99) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the changing effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a reachless variation (a variation that does not reach a reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (result of B2001 is “Y”), the first half notice group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, and production mode is set (B2002), and the variation command (
The address of the first half notice allocation group table corresponding to the MODE portion of the variable command) and the number of reserved special figure types is acquired (B2003). In the case of fluctuation without reach, since the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

When the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the variation pattern type is reachable variation, the production control device 300 corresponds to the model code, the special figure type, the production mode, and the symbol type. Set the notice distribution group address table (B2004)
The address of the first-order notice allocation group table corresponding to the MODE part of the fluctuation command (fluctuation command) and the fluctuation pattern type is acquired (B2005).

The production control device 300 performs a lottery for a notice appearing during the first half fluctuation (before reach) after Steps B2003 and B2005 (B2006). Subsequently, a second half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, presentation mode, and symbol type is set (B2007).
) Acquires the address of the latter half notice allocation group table corresponding to the ACT part of the variable command (B2008), and draws the notices appearing during the latter half change (during reach) (B2009).
). Thereafter, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the MODE part and ACT part of the fluctuation command (fluctuation command) are determined (B2010). Note that the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be found from the fluctuation commands.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the notice lottery result (B2011). Then, the stop symbol of the special display variation display game is determined according to the contents of the variation effect such as the reach effect or the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, for example, by determining the loose eye in the case of the off-line symbol.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B2013). When the power failure recovery display is not displayed (B20
13 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B2015. When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B2013 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the current variation is related to the main display symbol (B2014). The current variation is a decorative special map variation display game executed by the current variation command. For example, when the variable display of the decorative special figure 1 is greatly enlarged (normally displayed) at the center of the display device 41, the special figure 1 is the main display.

When the current variation is related to the symbol that is the main display (result of B2014 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the variation effect (B2015) and performs display setting of the notice effect. (B2016). Subsequently, the hold reduction display setting corresponding to the special figure type is performed (B2017), and the sound number that determines the effect mode by the speaker and the decoration number that determines the effect operation of the decoration device are set (B2018).

Next, the production control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B
2019), when there is a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) in addition to the first to third special symbols varying on the display device 41, display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed. (B20
20). Note that the fourth symbol variation may be displayed by an LED other than the display device 41.

On the other hand, the production control device 300 is displaying the power failure recovery display (the result of B2013 is “Y”), and the current variation is not related to the main display (B
If the result of 2014 is “N”), that is, the current fluctuation is a fluctuation during power failure recovery display and relates to a symbol that is reduced and displayed at the corner of the display device 41, a flashy presentation is not performed. The display setting of the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type is performed without setting the change effect or the notice effect (the processing from B2015 to B2018) (B2019).

[Modification of control of production control device]
Below, the modification of control (process) of an effect control apparatus is demonstrated. Configurations other than those described below are the same as the above-described control (processing) of the effect control device.

[Fluctuation interruption setting process (variation)]
A modified example of the above-described variation interruption setting process (B1324) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the change interruption setting process according to the modification. FIG. 101 is obtained by deleting steps B1402, B1403, B1410, and B1415 from FIG. 94 and adding steps T2115, T2116, T2117, and T2118. FIG.
1, the same processing as that in FIG. 94 is denoted by the same step number (symbol), and the description thereof is omitted.

The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 interruption command is in a low probability state (B14
When the result of 08 is “Y”) and the result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (B
The result of 1409 is “N”), and the freeze display setting of the changing effect of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is performed (T2115). The changing effects include the aforementioned changing effects and notice effects. The freeze includes, for example, freeze (stop) of a movie (moving picture). Here, display setting of a series of movies until freezing may be performed. Subsequently, display setting of a superimposed image (such as a movie display of a character or the like) for freeze effect displayed on the display device 41 is performed (T2116).
).

In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 interruption command is not in a low probability state (
If the result of B1413 is “N”) and the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B1414 is “N”), the display of the changing effect of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is displayed. Setting is performed (T2117). The changing effects include the aforementioned changing effects and notice effects. The freeze includes, for example, freeze (stop) of a movie (moving picture). Here, display setting of a series of movies until freezing may be performed. Subsequently, display setting of a superimposed video for freeze effect displayed on the display device 41 is performed (T2118).

In the above, the freeze effect was performed after receiving the special drawing suspension command.
Based on the pre-reading command, an effect may be given before receiving the special drawing interrupt command, and an effect may be given that freezes at the same time as receiving the special drawing interrupt command.

[Fluctuation resumption setting process (modified example)]
A modified example of the above-described fluctuation restart setting process (B1326) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the change restart setting process according to the modification. FIG. 102 shows a step T2 instead of the processing of steps B1505 to B1507 and B1510 to B1512 of FIG.
The processing of 210-T2215 and T2216-T2221 is included. In FIG. 102, the same processing as that in FIG. 95 is assigned the same step number (symbol), and description thereof is omitted.

After step B1504, the effect control device 300 sets the variation restart of the decorative special figure 1 (resumption of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) according to the probability state (T2210). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (T2211).
. When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of T2211 is “Y”), the change restart of the decoration special figure 1 (resumption of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game) with the reduced symbol (reduction display) is set (T221).
2).

The presentation control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command determines whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time when the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (result of T2211 is “N”) ( T2213). When the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (the result of T2213 is “Y”), the display setting of the rewind effect and the playback speed are set (T2214), and the fluctuation restart setting process is terminated. In the display device 41, the rewind effect is performed again at a high playback speed once again before the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. When the remaining fluctuation time is less than the predetermined time (the result of T2213 is “N”), the rewind effect is displayed and the accessory driving is set using the electric accessory because the time for the rewind effect is insufficient (T2215). ), The fluctuation resumption setting process is terminated.

Also, the decoration special figure 2 restart command effect control device 300 sets, after step B1509, a change restart of the decoration special figure 2 (resumption of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game) according to the probability state (T).
2216). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (T2217). When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of T2217 is “Y”), the change restart of the decoration special figure 2 with the reduced symbol (reduction display) (resumption of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game) is set (T2218). ).

The production control device 300 does not display the power failure recovery display (the result of T2217 is “N”).
), It is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (T2219). If the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (the result of T2219 is “Y”), the display setting of the rewind effect and the playback speed are set (T2220), and the fluctuation restart setting process is terminated. Note that the rewind effect is once again performed on the display device 41 before the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted,
It is performed at a high playback speed. When the remaining fluctuation time is less than the predetermined time (T2219)
Is “N”), the time for the rewind effect is insufficient, and the display of the resumption effect using the electric accessory and the setting of the accessory drive is performed (T2221), and the variable resumption setting process is terminated.

[Effects of First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, with reference to the time charts of FIG. 103 to FIG. 110, the operational effects of this embodiment (including modifications) will be described. In FIG. 103 to FIG. 110, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are abbreviated as the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game, respectively.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes game control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of executing a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner on the display device based on the establishment of the start condition.
When the result mode of the variable display game is a predetermined result mode (a winning result mode including a small hit result mode and a big hit result mode), a predetermined gaming state (a small hit state, a big hit state) that can give a game value to the player Can be generated.

The special figure 1 game process as the first control means executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first variation display game) based on the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning in the first start winning prize port 36). Take control. The special figure 2 game process as the second control means is that the second start condition is satisfied (for example, the second
The execution control of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second fluctuation display game) is performed based on the winning prize to the start winning opening 37.

Both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be in a running state (execution state). When one of the special display game and the special figure 2 display game is in the hit result mode (predetermined result mode), the other display game is terminated and the other change game is terminated. The display game may be used as a result of dismissal (FIGS. 53 and 54)
56A, 56B). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the trouble that both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game become the hit result mode. If both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are stopped in the hit result mode, the gaming machine 10 performs a hit operation related to one of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. A problem occurs because it can only be executed.

103 (FIG. 53, FIG. 54, FIG. 55A, FIG. 55B) for stopping the variation display of one variation display game in the hit result mode (in FIG. 103, the small hit result mode) as in the time chart of FIG.
) Can be executed to forcibly discontinue the variation display of the other variation display game in the result mode (FIGS. 53, 54, 56A, and 56B). Thereby, the other variable display game can be continued as much as possible. Also, the new other variable display game is not started until the predetermined game state (small hit state, big hit state) that occurs when one variable display game is in the hit result mode (see FIG. 35 of FIG. 35). Normal processing, special figure 2 normal processing in FIG. 36). Thereby, it is possible to further prevent the trouble that both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game become the hit result mode.

Also, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 104, when one variation display game is in the hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 104), the execution time (variation time) of the other variation display game is measured (measured). The other variable display game may be interrupted by stopping the update of the special figure game processing timer (time measuring means) (modified example of FIGS. 82, 83, 84, and 85). When the predetermined game state that occurs when one of the variable display games is in the hit result mode is completed, the other variable display game can be restarted by restarting the update of the special figure game processing timer (time measuring means) (FIG. 82). 83, FIG. 86 to FIG. As indicated by the hatched portion in FIG. 104, the other variation display game after resumption can be executed for the remaining variation time after the interruption (time remaining in the timer).

In addition, since the game can be resumed even if the other variable display game is interrupted, unlike the case where the game is forcibly stopped in the result mode, when the other variable display game is a hit result, It is possible to generate a predetermined gaming state (small hit state, big hit state) by the display game, and it is possible to prevent a problem that a player's profit is impaired. For example, if one variation display game derives the small hit result mode while the other variation display game in the big hit result mode is being executed, the other variation display game is interrupted. When the state is over, the other variation display game can be resumed to derive the jackpot result mode.

Further, when executing the process of stopping the fluctuation display of one fluctuation display game in the hit result mode, the process of interrupting the fluctuation display of the other fluctuation display game is executed. Can continue. While the other variation display game is interrupted, if the identification information of the other variation display game is displayed in a variable manner, the apparent variation can be continued, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

The game control program (game control program) stored in the storage means (ROM 111b) of the game control means (game control device 100) includes a main process and a timer interrupt process for the main process. Note that the present embodiment can be applied to other interrupt processing instead of the timer interrupt processing. In the same timer interruption process, the special figure 1 game process (first control means, first control process) has priority over the special figure 2 game process (second control means, second control process). After the process, the special figure 2 game process is executed.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 105 (a), when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a winning result mode and the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 2 game processing (FIG. 83) Since the game processing timer cannot be updated, the special figure 2 for measuring the execution time of the special figure 2 variable display game is shown.
The game processing timer (time measuring means) is updated only for the time (4 msec) of one interruption cycle (step A8416 in FIG. 84). As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the special figure 2 variable display game after the change is resumed is executed for the time of one interruption cycle. As shown in the time chart of FIG. 105 (b), when the timer is not updated, the interrupt period is 1 with respect to the entire variation time (t1 before the interruption + t2 after the interruption) when the update is performed. Batch time (4ms
The overall variation time is increased by ec). On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a winning result mode and the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, it is not necessary to update the timer for measuring the execution time of the special figure 1 variable display game.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 106 (a), there is a predetermined gaming state (small hit game state in FIG. 106) that occurs when the special figure 2 variable display game is in a hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 106). When the game ends, the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game is not delayed by a predetermined time (wait time) by the delay timer (delay means) (FIGS. 87 and 89). On the other hand, FIG.
As shown in the time chart of 06 (b), when the predetermined game state that occurs when the special figure 1 variable display game is in the hit result mode ends, the special timer 2 variable display game is restarted by a delay timer (delay means). Is delayed by a predetermined time (8 msec wait time) (S86 in FIG. 86).
21, S8814 in FIG. 88). By setting the delay timer, the timer interrupt process after the end of the hit state by the special figure 1 variable display game can restart the special figure 2 variable display game simultaneously with the start of a new special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 107 (a), the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed regardless of the fluctuation display state of the special figure 2 variable display game (stopped state, apparent changed state during interruption, etc.). A delay timer (8 msec wait time) may be set. As a result, in the timer interrupt process that performs the end process of the predetermined gaming state (the hit end process of FIGS. 67, 72, 86, and 88) that occurs when the special figure 1 variable display game is in the hit result mode, The special figure 2 fluctuation display game by the special figure 2 game process cannot be started (FIGS. 33 and 83). If the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied in the timer interruption process after the predetermined game state end process, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process are used. The fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be started simultaneously. In addition, at the timing of the end processing of the predetermined gaming state, the special figure 1
When the start memory and the special figure 2 start memory already exist (when the special figure 2 start memory is configured to be stored), or at this timing, the first start winning opening 36 and the second start winning opening 37 are entered. When there is a prize, the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied.

In addition, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 107 (b), when the special figure 2 variable display game is in the hit result mode, the timer interrupt process after the end process of the predetermined gaming state is set without setting the delay timer. If the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are started simultaneously by the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. it can.

Furthermore, when one variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped in the hit result mode, the remaining variation display game of the other variation display game Processing corresponding to the variation time (value of special figure game processing timer) may be performed (FIG. 8).
4 S8412). In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are ended at the same timing and the hit result is derived at the same time.

For example, based on the remaining variation time of the other variation display game, the other variation display game
Same timing as one of the variable display games stopped in the winning result mode (in the same interrupt processing)
It is determined whether or not there is a possibility of ending (S8412 in FIG. 84). Specifically, in the special figure 2 game process executed after the special figure 1 game process for stopping the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the hit result mode, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be zero. (It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec in the special figure 1 changing process).

When the special figure 2 variable display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as when the special figure 1 variable display game stops in the hit result mode, the special figure 2 variable display game If the result mode is the hit result mode, the interruption process in which the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted and the suspension of the variable display is postponed within the special figure 1 game process (the special figure 1 changing process in FIG. 84). If the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game is the outlier result mode, the special figure 2 variation display game is out of the special result state within the special figure 2 game process (particularly the special figure 2 variation process in FIG. 85). Process to stop.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 108 (a), the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted in the situation where both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may derive the hit result at the same time. Thus, it is possible to perform an interruption process for postponing the suspension of the variable display. Then, priority is given to the derivation of the hit result of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the hit state (winning action) by the special figure 1 variable display game starts first. After the hit state by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is finished, the hit result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is derived (the apparent fluctuation display during the interruption is stopped), and the hit state by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (hit Operation) starts, so there is no disadvantage to the player. In addition,
Special figure 2 Start memory (Special figure 1 hold) during the hit state (winning action) by the variable display game
Even if there is, the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started (the result of A3501 in FIG. 35 is “N”).
).

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 108 (b), the special figure 2 variable display game has the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as the special figure 1 variable display game for deriving the hit result (here, small hit).
If the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game is the outlier result mode, a process of stopping the special figure 2 variable display game in the off result mode is performed.
Even if this outlier result mode is derived as it is, no problem occurs. When performing the process of stopping the special figure 2 variable display game in the outlier result mode, the stop display time of the outlier result mode (the time from the stop to the confirmation of the outlier result) is the hit result of the special figure 1 variable display game. If it is set to be the same as the stop display time of the mode (the time from the stop until the confirmation of the hit result (fanfare start)), the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Also, as shown in the time charts of FIGS. 109 and 110, the game control device 100 (game control means) can recover from a power failure when a power failure occurs and the power is restored (powered on) while the other variable display game is interrupted. After the restoration (at the time of restoration or after restoration), before the execution control of one of the variable display games is started, an interruption control (interrupt command) indicating that the other variable display game is being interrupted is produced. 300 (production control means) (A1022 in FIG. 9B, FIG. 93)
A's B1305). The production control device 300 can grasp that the other variable display game is interrupted and one of the variable display games is in a hit state (during a hitting operation) by the interrupting command, Corresponding processes such as a process of displaying the winning symbol on the display device 41 (see the recovery screen display 1 in FIGS. 109 and 110) can be performed.

The production control device 300 may display a recovery screen (power failure recovery display) that suggests recovery of the power failure on the display device 41 when the power failure is recovered. Then, when the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the main display (first display) is interrupted, the command related to the control of the decorative special figure variation display game that has been interrupted after the power failure is restored. When the (command) is received, the recovery screen may be terminated. Examples of the commands related to the control of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game include a fluctuation command relating to the start of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game (see FIG. 109) and a special decoration figure stop command relating to the stop of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game (see FIG. 110). When a command (command) related to the control of the decorative special figure variation display game on the side (reduced display side, second display side) displayed in a size different from the main display is received, the restoration screen is not terminated.

When returning to the normal screen after the recovery screen is finished with the decorative special figure stop command, the default stop pattern may be used for the stoppage stop symbol. In the case of a winning stop symbol, a default winning symbol corresponding to the game value (number of rounds, etc.) in the winning state may be used. The background of the normal screen may correspond to a probability state or the like.

There is a possibility of receiving a command related to the control of the special display variation display game on the side other than the main display (reduction display side) before receiving the command related to the control of the special display variation display game on the main display. However, if the recovery screen is terminated at that time, there is a possibility that a problem occurs. For example, if the recovery screen is ended and the normal screen is displayed at the start of the reduced special display variation display game, even though the probability is low, the player is told that the probability change state (short time state) is in progress. There is a risk of misunderstanding. Therefore, as shown in the recovery screen display 2 in FIGS. 109 and 110,
Even when a command related to a new change start of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game (here, the special decoration figure 2) displayed in a reduced size is received, only the fluctuation display is started, and the recovery screen is not terminated.

The start storage means (for example, the game control device 100) stores the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game as the start memory based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition. It is possible. Start memory display control means (for example, segment L in FIG.
In the ED editing process and the main process in FIG. 90, the player can be notified by displaying the number of start memories stored in the start storage means in a predetermined start storage display area of the display device or display. . Then, the production control device 300 normally displays the number of start memories and the variation display of the variation display game resumed after the interruption in the restoration screen after restoration on the display device 41 (when the restoration screen is not being displayed). It may be displayed in a state with higher transparency. If the apparent variation display is continued even during the interruption, the variation display continued during the interruption may be displayed with a high transparency.
In the recovery screen, the fluctuation display displayed on the main display may be shake fluctuation.

[Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the following description, an embodiment (configuration) common to the first embodiment is applicable unless otherwise specified.

[Game board]
FIG. 111 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 111, the game board 30 includes a flat game board main body 30a serving as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and the game board main body 3
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of 0a. Gaming machine 10
Is configured to play a game by launching a game ball from a ball launcher into a game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window portion serving as a display area for the variable display game is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. A display device 41 is arranged behind the window formed in the center case 40 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays a plurality of identification information.

In the center case 40, an inflow port 40c to the warp passage 40a for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage portion 40b in which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40a can roll. And are provided. Stage part 4 of the center case 40
0b is arranged above the first start winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 33, so that the game ball rolling on the stage portion 40b wins the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variation winning device 33. It is easy. A lamp display device 80 is provided on the lower right side of the game area 32. The lamp display device 80 displays the starting memory number of each special figure variation display game.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided. A gate switch (SW) 34 a (see FIG. 115) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided inside the general diagram start gate 34. When a game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal start gate 34,
A usual figure change display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of a game ball to the general winning opening 35 is a winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning opening 35.
) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 115).

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a first start winning opening (first start winning area) 36 for giving a start condition for the special figure 1 variable display game, and a normal variable winning apparatus 33 just below that is provided. Is provided. The normal variation winning device 33 includes a movable member 33c that is converted into a state in which a game ball can flow by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side. Movable member 33c
When is closed, the game ball is not allowed to win the normal variation winning device 33.

In the second embodiment, unlike the conventional case, the special figure 1 variation display game is executed immediately by winning the prize winning port (general power prize winning port) of the normal variable prize winning device 33, or the special figure 1 start winning memory is stored. The configuration is memorized. Therefore, the public power prize opening (first start prize area) is the first start prize opening 3
Included in the category of No. 6, the general entrance prize switch is the start 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 115).
It is included in the category. That is, the general electric winning opening and the first start winning opening 36 correspond to a plurality of first start winning areas, and at least a part of the first start winning areas among the plurality of first starting winning areas is in a closed state and an open state. It is comprised as the normal variation prize-winning apparatus 33 which has the movable member 33c which can be converted into.

In the second embodiment, the game control device (game control means) 100 converts the movable member 33c of the normal variation winning device 33 into an open state and a closed state based on a predetermined lottery result of the normal variation display game. Is connected to a general-purpose solenoid 33b (conversion control means) (see FIG. 115). The movable member 33c of the normal variation winning device 33 is an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that opens the general winning prize opening by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted forward by the ordinary electric solenoid 33b. In addition, as the movable member 33c of the normal variation winning device 33, the so-called bello-type that allows the game ball to flow into the general power prize winning opening by sliding the movable member 33c back and forth by the general power solenoid 33b. Ordinary electric accessories may be provided. Game control device 100
When the result of the general-purpose variable display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the movable member 33c is rotated and opened via the general-purpose solenoid 33b, so that the game ball can flow into the normal variable winning device 33. Change to open state.

In addition, the game control device 100 increases the occurrence frequency of the easy-to-win state by shortening the variation time of the usual figure variation display game or setting the hit probability of the usual figure fluctuation display game higher than usual. The time-short state (general power support (electric support) state) is generated by extending the generation time of the easy winning state than the easy winning state generated in the gaming state.

The game area 32 on the lower right side of the center case 40 is provided with a second start winning opening (second start winning area) 37 for giving a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game. In addition, a first special variable winning device (lower large winning port) 38 is provided on the left side of the second starting winning port 37, and a second special variable winning device (upper) is provided above the second starting winning port 37. 39 is provided.

In the second embodiment, the first special variable prize-winning device (the lower prize-winning opening) 38 has a slide-type opening / closing door (opening-closing member) 38c, which is a tongue-like member, that moves forward and backward in the forward / backward direction, The state is converted into a state in which a sphere can flow (see, for example, JP-A-2017-77362). The first special variable winning device 38 converts the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure change display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the big prize opening. Is given a predetermined game value (prize ball).

The second special variation winning device (upper large winning opening) 39 includes a movable member 39c that is converted into a state in which a game ball easily flows by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side. When the movable member 39c is in the closed state, the game ball cannot be awarded to the special variation winning device 39.
The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure change display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls to the upper big prize opening. Is given a predetermined game value (prize ball).

The game control device (game control means) 100 can generate a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined special result. In the second embodiment, the special game state includes a small hit (first special game state) that can be generated when the small hit mode (first special result) and a big hit mode (second special result). Jackpots that can occur if
2nd special game state).

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 is based on the winning of the game ball in the general electric prize opening (first start winning area) or the first starting winning opening 36 (first start winning area). Execution control of the variation display game (first variation display game) can be performed. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes first execution control means for performing such control.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 has a second start prize opening (second start prize area).
Based on the winning of the game ball to 37, execution control of the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) can be performed. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes second execution control means for performing such control.

In addition, as will be described later, the game control device (game control means) 100, after the big hit (second special game state) is finished, is a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the hit probability is high) It is possible to perform control to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the game can proceed with ordinary power support. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes specific game state generation means for performing such control.

General winning opening 35, first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, normal variable winning apparatus 33,
When the game ball wins the big prize opening of the first special variable prize winning device 38 and the big prize opening of the second special variable prize winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 115) determines the type of the winning prize mouth. The number of prize balls corresponding to the number is discharged from the payout device to the upper plate 21. In addition, the game area 32 below the normal variation winning device 37 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

A ball guiding unit 850 is provided on the upper right of the second special variation winning device 39. Ball guide 8
A member 50 guides the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the game area 32 to the second special variation winning device 39 or the like by rolling it in the horizontal direction.

In addition, a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game) and a common figure fluctuation display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 59 that display information such as the current gaming state.

(Lamp indicator)
FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a lamp display device 80 according to the second embodiment. The lamp display device 80 is a variable display (a fourth special symbol) that repeatedly turns on and off.
Lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) for executing (flashing), and a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the start memory number (holding number) of each special figure variation display game. The lamp display device 80
Is controlled by the production control device 300.

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle as a variable display. Collective display device 50
In the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the common figure display 53, the game control device 100 measures the variation time of the variation display, while the lamp display unit 1 of the lamp display device 80, 2
The variation time is measured by the effect control device 300.

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (decoration special figure 1 hold LED1, decoration special figure 1 hold LED2) display the decoration special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) according to the light-off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (decoration special figure 2 hold LED1, decoration special figure 2 hold LED2) indicate the decoration special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) according to the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. indicate.

The blinking cycle of the lamp display units 1 and 2 (fourth special symbol described later) and the blinking cycle of the lamp display unit 3-6 (decoration special figure hold) are both the same 200 msec (100 msec on, 100 m).
sec off), but the blinking period may be made different so that it is easy to distinguish the decorative special figure hold from the fourth special symbol. Further, the on / off (display / non-display) time of the lamp display unit 1-6 may be varied.

FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the collective display device 50 according to the second embodiment. The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 display) (lamp D1) and a second special figure for a variable display game configured by a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. Fluctuation display unit 52
(Special figure 2 indicator) (lamp D2). Further, the collective display device 50 includes a round display section 53 (lamps D3-D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of opening / closing of the special variable prize-winning devices 38, 39) and the occurrence of a small hit, and a special figure 1 variable display. It has a memory display section 54 (special figure 1 hold indicator) (lamps D11-D14) for notifying the number of games started (held). In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a general diagram storage display unit 55 (general map hold display) (lamps D15 to D16) for informing the start (hold) storage number of the normal map display game.

In addition, the collective display device 50 has a first state indicating a winning probability state (high probability state or low probability state).
A game state display unit 56 (first game state display, probability state display unit) (lamp D9) and a second game state display unit 57 (second game state) for displaying an instruction of the firing direction (left-handed or right-handed) Display) (D17). Further, the collective display device 50 has a third gaming state display unit 58 (third gaming state indicator) (lamps D8, D10, D18) for displaying the hit state of the normal-variation display game.
). In addition, the collective display device 50 is configured to display a fourth game state display unit 59 (fourth game state display unit, interrupted state display unit) indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended ( Lamps D19, D20).

FIG. 114 shows various display units 53-58 constituting the collective display device 50 in the second embodiment.
It is a figure which shows the lighting aspect of (lamp D3-D20). The collective display device 50 includes various display units 5.
The state of the gaming machine corresponding to the lighting mode of 3-57 is displayed. Round display section 53 (lamp D
3-D7) is lit according to the number of rounds, and the memory display 54 (lamps D11-D14) is lit according to the number of suspensions (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 variable display game.

The general-purpose memory display unit (D15-D16) 55 is lit according to the number of suspensions (starting memory number) of the general-purpose variable display game. In the first game state display unit 56 (lamps D9 and D17), the lamp D9 is turned on in a high probability state, and the lamp D9 is turned off with a low probability. In the second game state display unit 57 (lamp D17), the lamp D17 is turned on when the player strikes right and the lamp D17 is turned off when the player strikes left. In the third game state display section 58 (lamps D8, D10, D18), the respective lamps are turned on / off / flashed in accordance with the lottery result of the usual variable display game. In addition, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the winning opening (the general electric winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33 are different for each of the normal figure 1, the common figure 2, and the common figure 3 shown in FIG. 114. Can do.

In the fourth game state display unit 59 (lamps D19 to D20), D19 is lit while the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, and D20 is lit while the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted. In this case, an interruption signal may be output as external information.

[Game control device]
FIG. 115 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a game control system of the game control device 100 according to the second embodiment. Hereinafter, although the example of a structure of the control system of the game control apparatus 100 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated, unless there is particular notice, a structure is a structure common to the thing of 1st Embodiment.

In the second embodiment, the gate switch 34a is different from the game control device 100 of the first embodiment.
Is provided. The gate switch 34 is an interface chip (proximity I / F) 121.
Connected to. The gate switch 34a detects a winning to the usual start gate 34. Moreover, in 2nd Embodiment, the general electric solenoid 33b is compared with the game control apparatus 100 of 1st Embodiment.
Is provided. The general electric solenoid 33b is connected to the first driver 138a.

Then, as will be described later, when the common random number value extracted when passing through the normal figure start gate 34 is a winning value, the game control device 100 drives the common electric solenoid 33b to move the movable member 33c for a predetermined time. It is rotated and opened (for example, for 0.3 seconds), and the game ball is changed to an open state in which it is easy to flow into the normal variation winning device 33.

Further, in the second embodiment, as described above, whether the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed by winning the winning opening (general winning prize opening) of the normal variable winning device 33 is shown in FIG. The memory is stored. Therefore, the general entrance prize switch is the start 1 switch 36.
It shall be included in the category of a.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, game state transition (transition) by the above-described game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing a transition of the game state in the second embodiment. FIG. 116 summarizes each gaming state.
The control by the game control device 100 in each game state, the control by the effect control device 300, and the characteristics in the game state are shown. In the second embodiment, the gaming state is:
There are a normal gaming state, a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a third specific gaming state.

First, each gaming state will be described. In the normal gaming state, the game control device 100
Control is made so that the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) is a low probability, and there is no ordinary power support (electric support). In the normal gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the normal mode. In the normal gaming state, left-handed is recommended as the launch direction. Therefore, since the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, the main variation special chart is a special figure one variation display game.

In the first specific game state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to be a high probability, and there is a general electric power support (the support count is 50 times). That is, in the first specific gaming state, it is controlled so that the conversion control by the ordinary electric solenoid (conversion control means) 33b is executed more than the normal gaming state, and the probability state is set to the high probability state. .

In the first specific gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the probability change mode. In the first specific gaming state, it is recommended that the game ball be fired in the right direction.
By making a right turn, it becomes easy to win the normal start gate 34, so the main start area becomes a winning opening (normal electric winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33. In the second embodiment, since the special figure 1 variable display game is executed by winning the public power prize winning opening, the main fluctuation special figure becomes the special figure 1 variable display game.

In the second specific gaming state, the game control device 100 performs control so that the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) is set to a high probability and there is no ordinary power support. That is, when a transition is made from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state, the ordinary electric solenoid (conversion control means) 3
It can be said that the conversion control by 3b is returned to the same control as the normal gaming state, and the probability state of the special figure is set to the high probability state (FIG. 119).

In the second specific gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the small hit RU.
SH. As will be described later, since the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is set to be short in the second specific gaming state, the small hit RUSH can be said to be a state in which small hits are likely to occur continuously in a short time. . As described above, in the second embodiment, when the second specific gaming state is executed, the small hit (first special result) is derived as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game). It is possible.

Also, in the second specific gaming state, it is recommended that the game ball be fired in the right direction. Therefore, the main start area is the second start winning opening 37, and the main variation special chart is a special figure two variation display game.

In the third specific gaming state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to be a low probability so that there is a general power support (the support count is 50). In the third specific gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the time reduction mode. In the third specific gaming state, it is recommended that the game ball be fired in the right direction. By making a right turn, it becomes easy to win the normal start gate 34, so the main start area becomes a winning opening (normal electric winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33. In the second embodiment, since the special figure 1 variable display game is executed by winning the public power prize winning opening, the main fluctuation special figure becomes the special figure 1 variable display game.

Next, transition (transition) from each gaming state will be described. Assume that a big hit (second special gaming state) occurs in the normal gaming state. When the big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit state is finished, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state. on the other hand,
When the big hit is the normal big hit in the normal gaming state, after the big hit state is finished, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the third specific gaming state.

When a normal big hit occurs in the first specific gaming state, after the big hit state ends, the gaming state shifts from the first specific gaming state to the third specific gaming state. In addition, when a probable big hit is generated in the first specific gaming state, after the big hit state ends, the gaming state shifts again to the first specific gaming state. On the other hand, in the first specific gaming state, when the big hit does not occur and the ordinary power support ends, the gaming state shifts from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state (see “High Support Rules” in FIG. 116). The “number of times” ends. “High support” indicates a state where the hit probability is high and there is electric support).

That is, in the first specific gaming state, as a condition for transitioning to another gaming state, a big hit (second
(Special gaming state) is a condition (first transition condition), and there are cases where a predetermined number of ordinary power support (execution of a variable display game) is a condition (second transition condition). In this way, for example, the first specific gaming state can be generated after the occurrence of the big hit (second special gaming state) in the normal gaming state. In the first specific gaming state, When the second transition condition is satisfied, the second specific gaming state can be generated.

In the second specific gaming state, if the big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit state ends, the gaming state shifts from the second specific gaming state to the first specific gaming state. On the other hand, when the big hit is the normal big hit in the second specific gaming state, after the big hit state ends, the gaming state shifts from the second specific gaming state to the third specific gaming state. That is, in the second specific gaming state, the occurrence of a big hit (second special gaming state) is a condition as a transition condition to another gaming state.

When a probabilistic big hit occurs in the third specific gaming state, after the big hit state ends, the gaming state shifts from the third specific gaming state to the first specific gaming state. Further, when a normal big hit occurs in the third specific gaming state, after the big hit state ends, the gaming state shifts to the third specific gaming state again. On the other hand, in the third specific gaming state, when the big hit does not occur and the ordinary power support ends, the gaming state shifts from the third specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (the “low support specified number of times” in FIG. 116). “End”. Note that “low support” represents a state where the hit probability is low and there is electric support.)

Since the gaming state shifts in this way, the gaming state can be shifted from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state after the probability variation big hit has occurred in the normal gaming state. In the first specific gaming state, the power transmission support is executed and the hit probability is set to a high probability.
It is possible to easily generate a big hit. And the interest of a game can be improved.

In addition, even if a big hit does not occur in the first specific gaming state, in the second embodiment, the gaming state shifts from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state. In the second specific gaming state, although the ordinary power support is not executed, the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed by winning the second start opening 37. Here, unlike the special figure 1 variable display game, the small hit probability in the special figure 2 variable display game is set to a high probability (in FIG. 119 described later, the small hit probability is set to a very high probability). Therefore, in the second specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the “small hit RUSH” mode in which a small hit (first special gaming state) is frequently generated until the next big hit occurs. And jackpot (
Since it is possible to increase the number of balls in a gaming state other than the second special gaming state), it is possible to provide a gaming machine 10 having a novel gaming property.

Also, in the first specific gaming state, there is a general power support, and in the second specific gaming state, there is no general power support in the same way as in the normal gaming state, so a small hit (first special gaming state) Can be executed with a good tempo.

Further, when the special figure variation display game is executed with the big probability in the second specific gaming state having a high probability state, the big hit (second special gaming state) is generated at an appropriate timing, and another gaming state is entered. The transition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the number of balls due to the excessive continued second specific gaming state.

Hereinafter, each process in the second embodiment will be described. In the process added in the second embodiment and the process to be described again for easy understanding, “A *******”
A ”is followed by a number in the 10,000 range.

[Timer interrupt processing]
A timer interrupt process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program) in the second embodiment. 117 is obtained by adding the process of step A11311 between step A1311 and step A1312 in FIG. Therefore, steps A1301 to A1
The processing up to 311 and the processing from step A1312 to A1315 are the same as in FIG.

In step A11311, the game control device 100 executes a general game process for performing a process related to the general variable display game (A11311). The details of the normal game process will be described later with reference to FIG.

By doing in this way, in a 2nd embodiment, a usual figure change display game can be performed. Then, when the normal figure variation display game is in a winning mode, the special entry variable display game is made by opening the winning opening (the ordinary winning prize opening) of the normal fluctuation winning device 33 and winning the game ball in the ordinary winning prize opening. Can start.

In particular, in the first specific game state and the third specific game state, the ordinary power support is executed (see FIG. 116). In the first specific gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be started frequently by the ordinary power support (electric support), and the hit probability is high, so that it is easy to generate big hits. be able to. Further, even in the third specific gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be easily generated by the ordinary power support.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3510) in the special figure 1 ordinary process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 118A is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 118A is obtained by adding step A13718 to step A3717 in FIG. Therefore, from step A3701 to A
The processing up to 3716 is the same as that in FIG.

Compared with the special figure 1 fluctuation start process in the first embodiment, the contents of the high probability fluctuation count update process (A3717) are partially different in the second embodiment, and a new short-time fluctuation count update process (
A13718) has been added.

The high probability variation number update process (A3717) is a process for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game when the hit probability is in a high probability state. Time-varying number of times update processing (A13718)
This is a process to update the number of times the time has been reduced, check the end of public power support, etc., and set the necessary information. It should be noted that the high probability variation number update process (A37 in the second embodiment).
17) and the details of the short-time variation frequency update process (A13718) are shown in FIG. 120 and FIG.
21 will be described later.

As described above, in the second embodiment, since the high probability variation number update process (A3717) is executed in the special figure 1 variation start process, it is possible to shift to the second specific game state with a high support prescribed number of times.

In the second embodiment, the time-varying number of times update processing (A13
718) is executed, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state with a low number of times of low support.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3605) in the special figure 2 ordinary process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 118B is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 118B is obtained by adding the processing of step A13809 after step A3808 in FIG. Therefore, steps A3801 to A
The processing up to 3808 has the same contents as in FIG.

The high probability variation number update process (A3808) is a process for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game when the hit probability is in a high probability state. Time-varying number of times update processing (A13809)
This is a process to update the number of times the time has been reduced, check the end of public power support, etc., and set the necessary information. It should be noted that the high probability variation frequency update process (A38 in the second embodiment).
08) and the details of the short time variation frequency update process (A13809), FIG. 120 and FIG.
21 will be described later.

As described above, in the second embodiment, since the high probability variation number update process (A3808) is executed in the special figure 2 variation start process, it is possible to shift to the second specific gaming state with a high support prescribed number of times.

In the second embodiment, the time-varying number of times update processing (A13
809) is executed, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state with a low number of times of low support.

FIG. 119 is a table illustrating a big hit probability, a small hit probability, a loss probability, and a probability variation probability in the second embodiment. These tables show the big hit probability (probability that the judgment result is a big hit), the small hit probability (probability that the judgment result is a big hit), the loss probability (the judgment result is out of place) by the big hit judgment processing and the small hit judgment processing described above. Probability) and probability of change (probability of entry)
Are shown for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. FIG. 119 (a)
Indicates the probability in the low probability state, FIG. 119 (b) indicates the probability in the high probability state, and FIG. 119 (c) indicates the probability variation entry rate.

Also in the second embodiment, the jackpot probability (the probability of jackpot occurrence) is a high probability state,
It is higher than the low probability state. Further, the small hit probability (occurrence probability per small hit) is the same in the high probability state and the low probability state. In addition, the structure which makes small hit probability high in a high probability state, and makes low in a low probability state is also possible. For example, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 variable display game in the low probability state may be set to “0”. Also, the loss probability (probability of occurrence) is lower in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a big hit mode (second special result) in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (first fluctuation display game) or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second fluctuation display game). A probability setting means that can be controlled into a low probability state in which the probability of deriving is set to a low probability and a high probability state in which a higher probability is set than the low probability state.

In the second embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 fluctuation display in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It becomes higher than the game, and the probability of loss is lower in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game (in the high probability state, the loss probability of the special figure 2 variable display game is 0.
Is). Therefore, in the second specific gaming state, it is possible to generate a small hit with a very high probability by winning the second start winning opening 37.

Also, as shown in FIG. 45 described above, in the low probability state, the second half offset data for long-time fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4507), and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has long fluctuation (
Long fluctuation). However, in the high probability state, the second half offset data for long-time fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not set, so the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a fluctuation of the normal fluctuation time (short fluctuation compared to the long fluctuation). become. As a result, in the second specific gaming state in the high probability state, small hits occur more frequently (small hit RUSH) in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the low probability state.

In the second embodiment, after the big hit state is finished, the probability variation state or the normal state is entered. FIG. 119 (c)
As shown in the figure, the 16R probability variation entry rate is 2% for both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, and the 4R probability variation entry rate is 60 for both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. %. That is, the probability variation entry rate is set to 62%. Then, after the big hit, the time reduction of 50 revolutions and the public power support are executed.

The 16R probability change entry rate is, for example, 2% for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and 40% for the special figure 2 change display game, and the 4R probability change entry rate is, for example, 60% for the special figure 1 change display game.
Alternatively, the special figure 2 variable display game may be set so that the distribution of the number of big hits in the probability change state of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is different. If configured in this way, if a winning jackpot is won in the small hit RUSH mode, it becomes possible to acquire a large number of game balls even during the big hit game, so more small hits are generated during the small hit RUSH. In addition to improving the game motivation of a player who wants to acquire a game ball, the expectation level for winning a promising big hit can be improved.

In addition, since the occurrence of a probable big hit will trigger the end of the small hit RUSH mode, the occurrence of the probable big hit may reduce the player's willingness to play, but even with this probable big hit, it is possible to acquire sufficient game balls. Therefore, the small hit RUSH again while maintaining the player's willingness to play
It is possible to give a new game motivation to enter the game.

[High probability change count update processing]
Next, high-probability fluctuation number update processing (A3717 (Special Figure 1 fluctuation start process), A3808 (Special Figure 2 fluctuation start process)) of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process in the second embodiment.
Details will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of high probability variation frequency update processing in the second embodiment. In the high probability variation number update process, the variation number of the special figure variation display game started in the high probability state (here, the high probability variation number as the remaining variation number) is updated and managed.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A15101).
When the state is not a high probability state (when the state is a low probability state) (the result of A15101 is “N”), the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

When the gaming control device 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A15101 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the high probability variation number indicating the remaining number of times of the special figure variation display game starting in the high probability state by −1 (1). (A15102). The initial value of the number of high probability fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the high probability state is maintained after the big hit ends, and is set to, for example, 50 (described later, special figure 1 big hit end process or special figure 2 big hit end process) ). Also, special figure 1 variable display game or special figure 2
Regardless of which of the change display games starts to change, the high probability change count is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of high probability fluctuations is 0 (A15).
103). When the number of high probability fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A15103 is “N”), that is,
If the high probability state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100
Ends the high probability variation number update process. When the number of high probability fluctuations is 0 (A15103
The game control device 100 saves a signal relating to high probability & no time saving in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A15104).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the special figure high probability & no time limit flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A15105), and corresponds to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start the fluctuation. The final variation flag without high probability & short time is set (A15106), and the high probability variation number update process is terminated. The final probability flag without high probability and short time will be described later.

As described above, by executing the high probability variation number update process in the second embodiment, the first
From the state of the specific gaming state (high probability, with electric support) of the second specific gaming state (high probability,
It is possible to shift to the state of “no electric support” (especially A15105).

[Short-time fluctuation count update processing]
Next, details of the time-varying number of times update process (A13718 (special figure 1 fluctuation start process)) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of time-varying frequency update processing in the second embodiment.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time is short (in a state with low probability and power support) (A15201). If the time is not short (the result of A15201 is “N”), the time-varying number of times update processing is terminated.

The game control apparatus 100 is in the case of a short time (a low probability & a state with electric support) (A1520).
If the result of 1 is “Y”), the number of short-time fluctuations is updated by −1 (subtracted by 1) (A15202).
. The initial value of the number of short-time fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the short-time mode is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to 50, for example (see FIG. 1 Big hit end processing or Special figure 2 in the second embodiment described later). Jackpot end processing). Moreover, even if any of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts to fluctuate, the time fluctuation number of times is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of short-time fluctuations is 0 (A152).
03). When the number of hourly variations is not 0 (the result of A15203 is “N”), that is, when the hourly mode continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100
The time-varying number of times update processing is terminated. When the number of time fluctuations is 0 (result of A15203 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal relating to low probability and no time saving in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A15204).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the special figure low probability & no short time flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A15205), and corresponds to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start the fluctuation. A low probability & no short time final variation flag is set (A15206), and the short time variation number update process is terminated.

As described above, by executing the time-varying number of times update processing in the second embodiment, the normal gaming state (low probability, no electric support) from the state of the third specific gaming state (low probability, electric support) appropriately. ) (In particular, A15205).

As described above, in the second embodiment, a part of the high probability variation number process in the first embodiment is changed, and the time variation variation number update process is added. Therefore, as a flag corresponding to the high probability final variation flag in the first embodiment, a high variation & short time final variation flag (A
15106) and low probability & no short time final variation flag (A15206) were introduced.

In order to cope with such a change, in the second embodiment, steps A2714, A3515, A3608, A5728, A5745, A5828, A58 in the first embodiment are used.
Forty-eight “high probability final change?” Is read as “final change?”. The “final variation” is a final variation in which the low probability and short-time state ends, and when the low probability & short-time-less final variation flag is set, it is determined that the final variation in the low probability and short-time state has been completed. In addition, when the high probability & short timeless final variation flag is set, it is determined that the final variation in the high probability and short time state has ended.

In the second embodiment, steps A2712 and A3514 in the first embodiment are used.
, A3607, A5737, and A5837 are read as "High probability or medium time?"

Further, in the second embodiment, “clear high probability variation number region” in step A5907 in the first embodiment is read as “clear high probability variation number region and short time variation number region”. In the second embodiment, step A590 in the first embodiment is used.
“Clear high probability final variation flag area” of 9 is read as “Clear final variation flag area”.

The “final fluctuation flag area” includes a high probability & timeless final fluctuation flag area for storing a high probability & timeless final fluctuation flag, and a low probability & low time & timeless final fluctuation flag for storage.
Includes the final variation flag area without time reduction.

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
Details of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a first flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment. FIG. 123 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

First, the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as the process number to return to the special figure 1 normal process (A16701), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A1670).
2). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the big hit (off data of 3 big hits per off data of 1 big hit) in the external information output data area (A1670).
3).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (A16704). Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability variation determination data is low probability data (A16705). Here, in the second embodiment, there are high probability data (high probability, with electric support) and low probability data (low probability, with electric support) as the probability variation determination data. If the probability variation determination data is not low probability data (low probability, with electric support) (“N” in step A16705), the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start with high probability and short time in the external information output data area. (A16706). On the other hand, when the probability variation determination data is low probability data (low probability, with electric support) ("Y" in step A16705), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A16720. The processing after step A16720 will be described later.

After the process of step A16706, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A16707). Subsequently, the game control device 100
Saves the signal related to the start with high probability & short time in the test signal output data area (A1).
6708). After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the right handing instruction (launch position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A16709).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number having a high probability in the game state display number area (
A16710), save the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A1671)
1) The turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A16712). Subsequently, a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A16713).
) And save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower university winning mouth fraud monitoring organization flag area (A1671)
4) The special figure status area is cleared (A16715).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves a flag with a high probability & a short time in the special figure game mode flag area (A16716). As a result, in the first specific gaming state, it is possible to increase the hit probability and execute the ordinary power support. In the first specific gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently executed in a high probability state. Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability variation number is saved in the high probability variation number region for retaining the high probability variation number, and the time variation is performed in the time variation region for retaining the time variation number. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16717). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16718), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved to the special figure 2 game. Save in the processing timer area (A16719) and end the special figure 1 big hit end processing.

In the aforementioned step A16705, the probability variation determination data is low probability data (low probability,
If there is electric support) ("Y" in step A16705), the game control device 100
Saves a signal regarding the start of low probability & short time in the external information output data area (A1
6720).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A16721). Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the start with low probability & short time in the test signal output data area (A16722). Thereafter, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (launching position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A1).
6723).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (
A16724), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A1672).
5) The turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A16726). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A16727).
), Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower-rank winning prize fraud start period flag area (A1672).
8) Clear the special figure status area (A16729).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the low probability & short time flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16730). As a result, in the third specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the ordinary power support and the time reduction mode. And it is possible to frequently generate the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the low probability variation number is saved in the low probability variation number region for holding the low probability variation number, and the time variation in the short time variation number region for retaining the time variation number is stored. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16731). After that, the probability information (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16732).
The special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A16733).
), The special figure 1 big hit end processing is ended.

By doing in this way, after the special figure 1 big hit ends, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with electric support)),
It is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state by setting the hit probability to a high probability and having the ordinary power support. Also, after the special figure 1 big hit, when the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, with electric support), the hit probability is set to low probability, and there is a general power support As described above, it is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
Details of the special figure 2 jackpot end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 124 is a first flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the second embodiment. FIG. 125 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

First, the game control device 100 sets “0” as the process number to return to the special figure 2 normal process (A16801), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A1680).
2). Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the big hit (off data of 3 big hits per off data of 1 big hit) in the external information output data area (A1680).
3).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (A16804). Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability variation determination data is low probability data (A16805). Here, in the second embodiment, there are high probability data (high probability, with electric support) and low probability data (low probability, with electric support) as the probability variation determination data. When the probability variation determination data is not low probability data (low probability, with electric support) (“N” in step A16805), the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start with high probability and short time in the external information output data area. (A16806). On the other hand, when the probability variation determination data is low probability data (low probability, with electric support) (“Y” in step A16805), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A16820. The processing after step A16820 will be described later.

After the process of step A16806, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A16807). Subsequently, the game control device 100
Saves the signal related to the start with high probability & short time in the test signal output data area (A1).
6808). Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves a signal (launching position designation signal 1) relating to the right-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A16809).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number having a high probability in the game state display number area (
A16810), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A1681)
1) The turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A16812). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A16813).
) And save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower university winning mouth fraud monitoring organization flag area (A1681).
4) The special figure status area is cleared (A16815).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves a flag with high probability & time reduction in the special-purpose game mode flag area (A16816). As a result, in the first specific gaming state, it is possible to increase the hit probability and execute the ordinary power support. In the first specific gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently executed in a high probability state. Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability variation number is saved in the high probability variation number region for retaining the high probability variation number, and the time variation is performed in the time variation region for retaining the time variation number. Is saved (for example, 50 times) (A16817). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16818), and the special figure 2 jackpot end processing ends.

In step A16805 described above, the probability variation determination data is low probability data (low probability,
If there is electric support) (“Y” in step A16805), the game control device 100
Saves a signal regarding the start of low probability & short time in the external information output data area (A1
6820).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A16821). Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the start with low probability & short time in the test signal output data area (A16822). Thereafter, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (launching position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A1).
6823).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (
A16824), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A1682).
5) The turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A16826). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A16827).
) And save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower grand prize opening fraud start period flag area (A1682).
8) Clear the special figure status area (A16829).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the low probability & short time flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16830). As a result, in the third specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the ordinary power support and the time reduction mode. And it is possible to frequently generate the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the low probability variation number is saved in the low probability variation number region for holding the low probability variation number, and the time variation in the short time variation number region for retaining the time variation number is stored. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16831). After that, the probability information (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16832)
Then, the special figure 2 big hit end processing is ended.

By doing so, after the special figure 2 big hit, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with electric support)),
It is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state by setting the hit probability to a high probability and having the ordinary power support. In addition, when the probability variation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, with electric support) after the special figure 2 big hit ends, the hit probability is set to low probability and the general power support is provided , It is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
Next, special figure 1 small hit end processing (A3218) in special figure 1 game processing of 2nd execution form.
Details will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit end process in the second embodiment. 126 shows steps A7207 and A7 in FIG.
The processing of step A17207 is added between the processing and 208. Therefore, the processing from step A7201 to A7207 and the processing from step A7208 to A7210 are the same as those in FIG.

In step A17207, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the time is short (A17207). When the game control device 100 determines that the time is not short (A1
The result of step 7207 is “N”), and the processing after step A 7208 is executed. On the other hand, if the time is short (the result of A17207 is “Y”), the processing after step A7210 is executed.

In this way, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state in which the firing direction is left-handed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, special figure 2 small hit end processing (A3321) in special figure 2 game processing of 2nd execution form.
Details will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 127 shows steps A7308 and A7 in FIG.
The process of step A17308 is added between the terminal 309 and the terminal 309. Therefore, the processing from step A7301 to A7308 and the processing from step A7309 to A7310 are the same as those in FIG.

In step A17308, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the time is short (A17308). When the game control device 100 determines that the time is not short (A1
If the result of 7308 is “N”), the processing after step A7309 is executed, whereas if the time is short (the result of A17308 is “Y”), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated.

In this way, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state in which the firing direction is left-handed.

[Special Figure 1 Big Hit End Process (Modification in Second Embodiment)]
A modified example of the second embodiment of the special figure 1 big hit end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 128 is a first flowchart showing a modification of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment. FIG. 129 is a second flowchart showing a modification of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

128 and 129 are different from the processing in FIGS. 122 and 123 in step A19719.
To A19723 and steps A19733 to A19737 are added. Therefore, steps A16701 to A16718 and step A1
Since the processing from 6720 to step A16732 has the same contents as those in FIGS. 122 and 123, description thereof will be omitted.

In step A19719, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (A19719). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of A19719 is “N”), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (A19722). The 2-game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (A19723), and the special figure 1 big hit end process is terminated.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (the result of A19719 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 produces a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing the restart of the special figure 2 variable display game. Prepare as a command (A19720) and execute a production command setting process (A
19721). The presentation control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 2 variable display game. After that, the aforementioned steps A19722, A19
The process of 723 is executed, and the special figure 1 big hit end process ends.

In Step A19733, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (A19733). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of A19703 is “N”), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (A19736). The 2-game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (A19737), and the special figure 1 big hit end process is terminated.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (the result of A19733 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 produces a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing to restart the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Prepare as a command (A19734) and execute a production command setting process (A
19735). The presentation control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 2 variable display game. Thereafter, the aforementioned steps A19736, A19
The process of 737 is executed, and the special figure 1 big hit end process ends.

128 and 129 show a second modification of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the first embodiment.
It can be said that it is modified so as to be applicable to the embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modified example of the special figure 1 big hit end process in the first embodiment, the following effect in the second embodiment is obtained. That is, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with electric support)) after the special figure 1 big hit ends, the hit probability is set to a high probability. At the same time, it is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state with the presence of the ordinary power support. In addition, when the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, with electric support) after the special figure 1 big hit ends, the hit probability is set to low probability and the general electric power support is provided , It is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state.

[Special Figure 2 Big Hit End Processing (Modification in Second Embodiment)]
A modified example in the second embodiment of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 130 is a first flowchart showing a modification of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the second embodiment. FIG. 131 is a second flowchart showing a modification of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

FIG. 130 and FIG. 131 are different from the processing in FIG. 124 and FIG.
To A19722 and steps A19833 to A19836 are added. Therefore, steps A16801 to A16818 and step A1
Since the processing from 6820 to step A16832 has the same contents as those in FIGS. 124 and 125, the description thereof will be omitted.

In step A19819, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (A19819). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (the result of A19819 is “N”), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (A19822). End the big hit end process.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (the result of A19819 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 produces a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game. Prepare as a command (A 19820) and execute a production command setting process (A
19821). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variable display game. Thereafter, the process of the above-described step A19822 is executed, and the special figure 2 big hit end process is ended.

In step A19833, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (A19833). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (the result of A19833 is “N”), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (A19836). End the big hit end process.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (the result of A19833 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 produces a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game. Prepare as a command (A19834) and execute a production command setting process (A
(19835). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variable display game. Thereafter, the processing of the above-described step A19836 is executed, and the special figure 2 big hit end processing is ended.

130 and 131 show a second modification of the special figure 2 jackpot end process in the first embodiment.
It can be said that it is modified so as to be applicable to the embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modified example of the special figure 2 jackpot end process in the first embodiment, the following effect in the second embodiment is obtained. That is, after the special figure 2 big hit ends, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with ordinary power support)),
It is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state with a high probability of hitting and having a utility support. Also, after the special figure 2 big hit, when the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, with ordinary power support), the hit probability is low probability, and there is general power support, It is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state.

[Special Figure 1 Small Hit End Processing (Modification)]
Next, special figure 1 small hit end processing (A3218) in special figure 1 game processing of 2nd execution form.
A modification of the above will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hits end process according to the modification. FIG. 132 shows steps A7207 and A in FIG.
The processing of Step A17207 is added between the current time and 7208. Therefore, the processing from step A7201 to A7207 and the processing from step A7208 to S8814 are the same as those in FIG.

In step A17207, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time is short (A17207). When the game control device 100 determines that the time is not short (A
The result of step 17207 is “N”), and the processing after step A7208 is executed. On the other hand, when the time is short (the result of A17207 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not step S881.
The process after 0 is executed.

FIG. 132 can be said to be a modification of the modified example of the special figure 1 small hit end process in the first embodiment so as to be applicable to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modified example of the special figure 1 small hit end process in the first embodiment, the following effect is obtained. That is, according to the above processing, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state in which the firing direction is left-handed.

[Special Figure 2 Small Hit End Processing (Modification)]
Next, special figure 2 small hit end processing (A3321) in special figure 2 game processing of 2nd execution form.
A modification of the above will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hits end process according to the modification. FIG. 133 shows steps A7308 and A7309 in FIG.
The process of step A17308 is added between Therefore, step A73
The processing from 01 to A7308 and the processing from steps A7309 to S8914 are the same as those in FIG.

In step A17308, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the time is short (A17308). When the game control device 100 determines that the time is not short (A
The result of step 17308 is “N”), and the processing after step A7309 is executed. On the other hand, when the time is short (the result of A17308 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the step A891.
The process after 1 is executed.

FIG. 133 can be said to be a modification of the modified example of the special figure 2 small hit end process in the first embodiment so as to be applicable to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modified example of the special figure 2 small hit end process in the first embodiment, the following effect is produced. That is, according to the above processing, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state in which the firing direction is left-handed.

[Normal game processing]
Next, details of the usual game process (A11310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the usual game process. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

First, the game control apparatus 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A17601). For details on the gate switch monitoring process, see
It will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 monitors the input from the general power prize opening switch that detects the winning (winning) to the winning opening (the general power prize opening) of the normal variable prize winning device 33. Is executed (A17602). In the second embodiment, unlike the conventional case, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning memory is stored by winning a prize at the general power prize winning opening. Accordingly, it is assumed that the general power prize winning port is included in the category of the first start winning port 36, and the general power winning port switch is included in the category of the starting port 1 switch 36a. Details of the power receiving prize switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the usual game processing timer is not 0 (1
(A17603). Note that the minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the usual game process timer has become 0 (A17604).

When the value of the usual game processing timer is 0 (the result of A17604 is “Y”), that is, when the game control device 100 has timed up or has already timed up,
A general game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the normal game process number is set in the register (A17605).

Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number based on the set ordinary game sequence branch table (A17606).
Then, a subroutine call is made with the usual game process number, and a game branching process corresponding to the usual game process number is executed (A17607).

When the game process number is “0” in step A17607, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of change of the normal map change display game, sets the start of change of the normal view change display game, sets the effect, The usual figure usual process which performs the setting etc. of information required in order to perform the process during a usual figure change is performed (A17608). Details of the routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, when the game process number is “1” in step A17607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a process for changing the normal map for setting information necessary for performing the process for displaying the normal map ( A17609). Details of the process during normal map change will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, when the game process number is “2” in step A17607, the game control device 100 determines whether the current state of the time-variable display game is successful, The processing for displaying a normal map for setting the opening time, setting of information necessary for performing the processing for the normal map, etc. is executed (A17610). Details of the processing for displaying a normal map will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, when the game process number is “3” in step A17607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the information necessary to continue the process during the normal drawing or to perform the general electric remaining ball process. The middle processing is executed per figure (A17611). For more information about the processing during the usual map,
This will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, when the game process number is “4” in step A17607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a general electric power remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the end process for the normal map (A17612). ). The details of the ordinary figure remaining ball process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, when the game process number is “5” in step A17607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a normal figure end process for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (A17608). (A17613). Details of the normal hit processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a normal figure fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal figure indicator 53 (A17614). Thereafter, the symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the normal symbol by the ordinary symbol display 53 is executed (A17615), and the ordinary symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the usual game process timer is not 0 (A1760)
4 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, step A1761
Processes after 4 are executed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A17601 in the usual game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (
A17701). If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A17701 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the game state is a right-handed game (A17702). Here, the right-handed gaming state is a big hit state, a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a third specific gaming state. When the game state is a right-handed game (the result of A17702 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A17705. If the game state is not right-handed (the result of A17702 is “N”), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A17703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A17704). Receiving the left-handed instruction notification command, the production control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing to left-hand.
Is executed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 obtains the number of reserved drawings and determines whether or not the number of reserved drawings is less than an upper limit (for example, 4) (A17705). The game control apparatus 100, when the number of reserved drawings is less than the upper limit (the result of A17705 is “Y”), updates the number of reserved drawings +1 (A17706) and corresponds to the updated number of reserved drawings The address of the random number storage area per hit is calculated (A17707). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A17708), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storage area (A177).
09), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control apparatus 100 has no input to the gate switch 34a (A17701).
Is “N”), or when it is determined that the number of reserved drawings is not less than the upper limit (A17)
When the result of 705 is “N”), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (A17602) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the general power winning switch monitoring process. Note that, as described above, the public power prize winning switch is included in the category of the starting port 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 115).

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal figure is being hit, that is, whether or not the normal fluctuation display game is in a hit state and the normal fluctuation winning device 33 is executing a predetermined number of releasing operations. (A17801). And if it is normal, (A17801 result is “Y
]), It is determined whether or not there is an input to the public power prize winning switch (A17802). When there is an input to the general power prize winning switch (the result of A17802 is “Y”), the count number of the general power counter is updated by one (A17803).

Next, in the game control device 100, the count number of the updated ordinary power counter is an upper limit value (for example,
It is determined whether or not 6) has been reached (A17804). When the count number reaches the upper limit (the result of A17804 is “Y”), the hit end pointer value (for example, 4 or 7) is loaded from the normal end pointer area in the RWM, and is stored in the RWM. Is saved in the control pointer area during the normal map (A17805).

Finally, the ordinary game processing timer is cleared (A17806), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if there are more than the upper limit during the normal hit state,
At that time, the hit end value is saved in the normal processing hitting control pointer area, and the normal variation winning device 33 is closed so that the hit state of the normal drawing ends in the middle.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is not hitting the normal map (the result of A17801 is “N”), the game control device 100 is determined that there is no input to the general power prize switch (the result of A17802 is “N”). ), Or when it is determined that the count has not reached the upper limit (A178)
The result of 04 is “N”), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (A17608) in the usual figure game process will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the routine of ordinary processing.

First, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the number of reserved drawings is 0 (A17901).
). If the number of reserved symbols is not 0 (the result of A17901 is “N”), a random number is loaded from the RWM random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) and the random number storage area of the RWM per symbol The random number random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the regular symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common figure after loading are cleared to 0 (A17902). ).
Furthermore, whether or not the probability of a hit result in the normal map display game is higher than normal (high probability state), that is, whether or not it is in a short time state (normal power support state) Is determined (A17903). The probability per ordinary figure during the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per ordinary figure during the low probability is 0/251.

The game control apparatus 100 sets a low probability lower limit determination value (here, 251), which is a lower limit determination value in the normal figure low probability, when the normal probability is not high (the result of A17903 is “N”) (A179
04) If the normal figure high probability is in effect (the result of A17903 is “Y”), a high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1) which is the lower limit determination value in the normal figure high probability is set (A17905), and step A1
The processing shifts to 7906.

The game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or larger than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A17906). Note that the upper limit judgment value here is common between the high probability of ordinary figures and the low probability of ordinary figures. If the winning random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (the result of A17906 is “Y”), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step A17908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A17906 is “N”), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A17907).

When the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A17907 is “Y”), that is, in the case of a loss, the game control apparatus 100 saves the shift information in the hit flag area (A1790).
8). Furthermore, the stop symbol number is set as the normal symbol stop symbol number (A17909),
The off symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A17910), and step A179.
The process proceeds to 14.

When the winning random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (result of A17907 is “N”), that is, in the case of winning, the game control apparatus 100 saves the winning information in the winning flag area (A17911),
A hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (A17912), and hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A1791).
3) The process proceeds to step A17914. There may be several types of hit stop symbols, and in this embodiment, there are three (1 per universal, 2 per universal, 3 per universal).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the general symbol stop symbol area (A179).
14) The stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A17915), the random number storage area per common figure is shifted (A17916), and the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (A1)
7917), and the usual figure hold number is updated by -1 (A17918).

That is, with the execution of the usual figure change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved drawings that are on hold after the number 1 of reserved maps are incremented one by one.
As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A17919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the usual game process timer area (A
17920). For example, the fluctuation time is 500 msec with probability 200/256, probability 40 /
256 is assigned to 1500 msec and probability 16/256 is assigned to 3000 msec. Then, the process for setting the transition to the normal process is executed (A17921), and the normal process is terminated. In addition, the process transition setting process during normal map change will be described later.

In addition, when the number of pending charts is 0 (the result of A17901 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as the process number for shifting to the usual chart process (A17922).
), The process number is saved in the usual game process number area (A17923). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (A17924), and the normal processing is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
FIG. 138 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a process transition setting process during normal map change. The processing for setting the transition to the normal map change processing is step A17921 in the normal map normal processing shown in FIG.
Is executed.

The game control device 100 first sets “1” as the process number for shifting to the process of changing the normal map.
Is set (A18101), and the process number is saved in the usual game process number area (A181).
02).

After that, the game control device 100 sends a signal (ordinary symbol 1) related to the start of the universal map display game.
The changing signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A18103), and a changing flag indicating that the usual figure change display game is changing is saved in the usual figure change control flag area (A18104). Then, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the flashing cycle timer of the normal display, is saved in the normal flashing control timer area (A18105).
), The initial value (0 in this case) is saved in the common figure variation symbol number area (A18106). Thereafter, the process transition setting process during normal map termination is completed.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the normal-fluctuating process (A17609) in the normal-game process will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of processing during normal map change.

First, the game control device 100 sets the process number to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the process for displaying the normal diagram (A18301), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A18302). After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves the normal figure display time (for example, 0.6 seconds), which is the display time of the result of the normal figure change display game on the normal figure display, in the normal figure game processing timer area (A18303). .

Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of the normal change (normal symbol 1 changing signal is OFF) in the test signal output data area (A18304). Then, a stop flag indicating that the usual figure fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the usual figure fluctuation control flag area (A
18305), the process during normal map change is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process for displaying a normal map (A17610) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the normal map display process.

First, the game control device 100 loads a hit flag (hit information or out-of-game information) set in the normal processing (A18401), and clears the RWM hit flag area (A1).
8402). Then, it is determined whether or not hit information is set for the loaded hit flag (A18403).

When the hit information is set to the hit flag, the game control device 100 (A1840).
The result of 3 is “Y”), the hit processing setting table is set (A18404), and the hit start pointer value corresponding to the usual figure stop symbol information (here, values corresponding to each of 1, 2, and 3 per ordinary figure) ) Is acquired and saved in the control pointer area during the normal map (A18405). In addition, the hit end pointer value corresponding to the normal map stop symbol information (here, values corresponding to each of the normal map 1, 2, and 3)
Is saved in the end pointer area per ordinary map (A18406). Next, the time for opening the electric train corresponding to the general-purpose stop symbol information (here, the values corresponding to each of the general-purpose symbols 1, 2, and 3) is acquired and saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (A18407). With the above processing, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 33 in the probability changing state or in the short time state (in the normal power support state) is set, and for example, it can be opened three times or twice.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets “3” as the process number for shifting to the normal process per game.
Is set (A18408), and the process number is saved in the usual game process number area (A18).
409). Thereafter, a signal relating to the hit of the normal variation display game (ordinary signal per ordinary symbol is turned on) and a signal relating to the start of ordinary electric operation (ordinary electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on) are saved in the test signal output data area. (A18410). Further, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the ordinary electric solenoid 33b, on data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (
A18411).

Further, the game control device 100 clears the information in the normal power count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 33 (A18412), and the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 33 in the normal power fraud monitoring period is obtained. Clear the stored information on the PWD illegal prize area (A18413)
. Finally, a flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 33 is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (A18414).

The game control device 100 determines that the hit information is not set in the hit flag (A184).
03 result is “N”), and “0” is set as the process number to shift to the normal routine process (
A18415), the processing number is saved in the usual game processing number area (A18416). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the ordinary electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (A18417).
Then, the processing for displaying the normal map is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the normal game hitting process (A17611) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during the normal drawing.

First, the game control apparatus 100 loads and prepares a control pointer during a normal game (A186).
01) It is determined whether or not the value of the loaded normal control pointer per normal map has reached the value of the normal control pointer upper limit value area per normal map (value of hit end) (A18602).

When the value of the control pointer during the normal map does not reach the value of the upper limit area for the control pointer during the normal map (the result of A18602 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs the control during the normal map. The pointer is updated by +1 (A18603). Further, the ordinary power operation transition setting process is executed (A18604), and the process during the normal figure is terminated. The details of the ordinary power operation setting process will be described later.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer during the normal figure reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal figure (the value of the end of hit) (the result of A18602 is “Y”), Without executing the process of updating (+1) the normal process control pointer area in step A18603, the normal power operation transition setting process is executed (A18604), and the normal process in normal map is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal power operation transition setting process (A18604) in the normal map processing will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the ordinary power operation transition setting process. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal electric solenoid 33b for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 33, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer.

The game control device 100 first branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (A187).
01). Here, the value before updating in step A18603 is used as the control pointer. If the value of the control pointer is 0, 2, or 5, step A1870
In order to control the blockage of the normal variation winning device 33 by shifting to the process of No. 2, the wait time (for example, 300 msec) after the blockage of the normal variation winning device 33 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the normal game processing timer area. (A18702).

Further, the game control device 100 sets off data in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the general power solenoid 33b (A18703), and ends the normal power operation transition setting process.

If the value of the control pointer is 1 or 3, the game control device 100 proceeds to the process of step A18704 and controls the release of the normal variation winning device 33.
The opening time of the normal train (for example, the opening time of the normal variation winning device 33 corresponding to the control pointer (for example,
1700 msec) is saved in the usual game processing timer area (A18704). Further, on-data is set in the normal-power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal-power solenoid 33b (A18705), and the normal-power operation transition setting process is terminated.

If the value of the control pointer is 6, the game control device 100 determines that the step A1
In order to control the release of the normal variation winning device 33 by proceeding to the processing of 8706, the normal power release time (for example, 2600 mse) that is the opening time of the normal variation winning device 33 corresponding to the control pointer.
c) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A18706). Further, on data is set in the general power solenoid output data area to turn on the general power solenoid 33b (A1).
8707), the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

Furthermore, if the value of the control pointer is any of 4 and 7, the game control device 100
In step A18708, in order to end the release control of the normal variation winning device 33 and execute the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (A17612), “4” is set as the process number (A187).
08), the processing number is saved in the usual game processing number area (A18709).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the ordinary power remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the ordinary game processing timer area (A18710). Thereafter, the off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area in order to set the general-purpose solenoid 33b to off (A187).
11) The normal operation transition setting process is terminated.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (A17612) in the ordinary game process will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process.

First, the game control device 100 sets a process number “5” related to the end process per common figure (A1).
8901), the processing number is saved in the usual game processing number area (A18902). Thereafter, the usual time ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the usual time game processing timer area (A18903).

Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of the operation of the normal variation winning device 33 (the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) in the test signal output data area (A18904).
. Subsequently, the normal power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 33 is cleared (
A18905) and the control pointer area during the normal map is cleared (A18906).
After that, the normal pointer end pointer area is cleared (A18907), and the general electric power remaining ball processing is ended.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (A17613) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the end-of-normal-draw process.

First, the game control device 100 sets a process number “0” related to the normal routine process (A191).
01) Further, the process number is saved in the usual game process number area (A19102). After that, a signal related to the end of the normal game is saved in the test signal output data area (A19103).

In addition, the game control device 100 saves a flag (a fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 33 in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (A19104).
Thereafter, the process for ending the usual figure is ended.

[Effects of Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the function and effect of the second embodiment will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 145 is a time chart of the operation of the first special variable winning device 38 in the small hit RUSH. In FIG. 145, in order to explain the operation of the first special variation winning device 38 in the second specific gaming state, the execution state and stop state of the special figure 2 variable display game (described as “special figure 2 game”), The state of execution of the small hitting operation, the opening / closing state of the lower large winning opening (the winning opening of the first special variable winning apparatus 38), and the state of the game ball in the vicinity of the opening / closing door of the lower large winning opening are shown.

When the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment generates a small hit (first special gaming state), the sliding opening / closing door (opening / closing member) 38c of the first special winning device 38 is changed from the closed state to the open state. Convert. The first special prize-winning device 38 has a configuration in which a game ball stays on the opening / closing door (opening / closing member) 38c when the opening / closing door (opening / closing member) 38c is closed. Further, the game balls staying on the opening / closing door (opening / closing member) 38c when the opening / closing door (opening / closing member) 38c is in an open state can be won. This makes it possible to open and close the door (opening and closing member) even when the open state is short.
A configuration in which a lot of game balls can be won by winning the game balls staying in 38c in the first special prize-winning device 38, and the number of balls can be increased efficiently in the second specific game state. It has become.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the aforementioned small hit RUS in the second specific gaming state
When H is generated, the variation starts every time the second start winning opening 37 is won. 119 described above
As shown in FIG. 2, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 is set to be extremely high in both the low probability state and the high probability state, and the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed in the second specific gaming state. The fluctuation is set to short fluctuation. Therefore, small hitting operations occur one after another.

When a small hit occurs, the big prize opening is opened a plurality of times (for example, eight times) for each small hit. During the small hitting operation (first special game state), the time of the lower special winning opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is set shorter than the time of the closed state. For example, while the closing time of the lower prize winning opening is 1.2 seconds, the opening time can be 0.2 seconds.

The special variable prize-winning device unit constituting the first special variable prize-winning device 38 has a configuration in which the downward flow force of the game ball on the open / close door 38c is weakened (see, for example, JP-A-2017-77362).
Thereby, the game ball is likely to stay on the open / close door 38c.

In such a configuration, when a small hit RUSH occurs where a small hit occurs at a high frequency, the closed state time of the lower prize winning opening is set longer than the open state time, so there is much time for the closed state. Can be retained on the open / close door 38c. Thereafter, since the open / close door 38c is opened, many game balls staying on the open / close door 38c win the lower large winning opening at once. Thereby, when a small hit RUSH is generated, a lot of prize balls can be given to the player.

By doing so, in the probability variation loop type gaming machine 10 as in the second embodiment, the small hit RUSH can be executed in the second specific gaming state after exiting the first specific gaming state. , It is possible to realize a new gameability that a game ball can be acquired as it gets more.

In addition, with reference to FIG. 145, a small hit occurs in a predetermined variation display game,
When a small hit occurs in the next variation display game of the predetermined variation display game, a period for securing the flow and staying state of the game ball is secured by the variation period of the identification information in the next variation display game. be able to. Thereby, when the small hit operation continues for two games, the game ball can be retained on the open / close door 38c by using the variation time of the later game. Then, a lot of game balls staying on the open / close door 38c can be awarded to the lower prize opening at a stretch, and a lot of prize balls can be given to the player.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment, after the end of the big hit (second special game state), when the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times in the first specific game state, Since the transition is made to the second specific gaming state from which the first special result) can be derived, a novel gaming state transition that is not possible in the past can be performed. Further, according to the gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) to which many small hits are allocated can be efficiently changed.

[Third Embodiment]
A gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. In the following description, a configuration common to the second embodiment can be applied unless otherwise specified. In addition, the structure which is not described in 2nd Embodiment and 3rd Embodiment can apply the structure common to 1st Embodiment.

The third embodiment relates to a small hit effect that notifies the occurrence of a small hit state. In particular, the small hit effect includes a congratulatory effect that congratulates and notifies the occurrence of a small hit. It should be noted that the blessing effect does not include the display of the small hit stop symbol (stop display of the small hit) itself.

Note that when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit result (small hit mode, first special result, first win result), a small hit state (first special game state) occurs. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit result (big hit mode, second special result, second win result), the game value (out of balls, number of acquired balls) more advantageous to the player than the small hit state Big hit state that can be granted (second
Special gaming state) occurs.

The total opening time of the big winning opening is longer in the big hit state than in the small hit state, so in the big hit state (second special game state), the game is more than the small hit state (first special game state). There are many game values that can be acquired by the player (the number of balls to be played and the number of acquired balls), and it is possible to give a game value that is more advantageous to the player than the small hit state. Note that, in both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is in an open state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the small hit state is referred to as a first special gaming state, and the big hit state is referred to as a second special gaming state. .

In addition, in the small hit, a normal small hit (normal small hit) where a small hit state is generated by the small hit result of the main variation display game, and an irregular small where a small hit state is generated by the small hit result of the sub-variable display game. There is a hit. The big hits include a normal big hit in which a big hit state is generated by the big hit result of the main variation display game, and an irregular big hit in which a big hit state is generated by the big hit result of the sub change display game.

Here, the main variation display game is executed based on the entrance of the game ball into the main start area (main area, main start winning opening) where game balls often enter, This is executed based on the entry of a game ball into a sub-start area (sub-area, sub-start winning prize port) where game balls are less likely to enter than the start area. Similar to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the main variation display game and the sub variation display game can be in a state of being executed simultaneously (both simultaneously) (simultaneous variation is possible).

As described with reference to FIG. 116, in the normal gaming state (first gaming state), the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting region) becomes the main starting region where game balls are often entered, and the second starting winning prize is obtained. The mouth 37 (second start area) is a sub-start area where game balls are less likely to enter than the main start area. The main fluctuation display game is a special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the secondary fluctuation display game is a special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 116, in the small hit RUSH state (second specific game state, second game state), the second start winning opening 37 (second start region) may enter a game ball. The main start area is a large number, and the first start winning opening 36 (first start area) is a sub start area where game balls are less likely to enter than the main start area. The main fluctuation display game is a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the secondary fluctuation display game is a special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The small hit RUSH state (second specific game state) is a state in which the hit probability is high and there is no ordinary power support.

In the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is long-time fluctuation (long fluctuation, for example, 10 minutes), and it is recommended that a game ball be inserted into the first start winning opening 36. And
Left-handed, which makes it easier to enter the game ball into the first start winning opening 36, is more advantageous and recommended for the player than right-handed. In the normal gaming state, the display device 41 can display a left-handed display for recommending left-handed to the player (display for recommending a game ball to enter the first start winning opening 36). Note that left-handed shots that launch game balls toward the left side (first game area) of the game area 32 are referred to as a first launch mode of the ball launcher (launching means), and the right side of the game area 32 (second game area). Right-handed toward is called the second launch mode of the ball launcher.

In the small hit RUSH state (small hit rush state), it is possible to generate a small hit with a very high probability by winning at the second start winning opening 37, so that a game ball can enter the second starting winning opening 37. Recommended. Then, the right strike (second launch mode) that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 37 is more advantageous and recommended than the left strike (first launch mode). In the small hit RUSH state, the display device 41 can display a right-handed display for recommending a right-hand hit to the player (a display for recommending a game ball to enter the second start winning opening 37).

In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 116, in the first specific game state and the third specific game state, the game control device 100 has a general power support, and therefore the winning port (the general power prize) Mouth) is a main starting area where game balls are often entered, and the first starting winning area 36 or the second starting winning area 37 is a sub-start area where game balls are less likely to enter than the main starting area. Become. Also, right-handed is preferred and recommended for players over left-handed.

In the first specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state, the main variation display game is a special figure 1 variation display game that is executed on the basis of the entrance to the general electric winning award (main starting area), and is subject to variation. The display game is a special figure 1 variation display game that is executed based on the entry into the first start winning opening 36 (subordinate start area), or the second game winning entrance 37 (subordinate start area). It becomes the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which is executed based on. Note that the game control device 100 determines whether the game is a special figure 1 variable display game that is executed based on whether the first start winning opening 36 or the general power winning opening is entered. Include information on whether the game ball is detected by the start opening 1 switch of the start winning opening 36 or the general electric prize opening switch) in the variation command (variable command) and the decoration special figure 1 command (design command), You may transmit to the production control apparatus 300.

In summary, in the normal gaming state (the first gaming state), it is recommended that a game ball enter the first start winning opening 36 (first starting area), and the first starting winning opening 36 becomes the main starting area. ,
The second start winning opening 37 (second start area) is a sub-start area. In the small hit RUSH state (second game state), it is recommended that a game ball enter the second start winning opening 37 and the second start winning opening 3
7 is the main start area, and the first start winning port 36 is the sub start area. In addition, in the first specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state, it is recommended that a game ball be entered into the ordinary power prize winning port of the normal variation winning device 33, and the ordinary power winning prize port becomes a main starting area, The first start winning port 36 or the second start winning port 37 is a secondary start region.

In addition, the production control device 300 includes information on the latest winning command received, information on the recently received symbolic command (B1801 special symbol type, B1802 symbol type), high support prescribed number of times (for example, 50 times), Based on the number of times of low support (for example, 50), the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the big hit, the probability information (B1313), the current gaming state is the normal gaming state,
It can be determined whether the small hit RUSH state, the first specific gaming state, or the third specific gaming state. It should be noted that the current gaming state can also be determined from the production mode (B1318) such as the normal mode, the probability variation mode, the time reduction mode, and the small hit RUSH mode in FIG.

In the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 continuously displays a left-handed display 656 (described later) on the display device 41 while the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, and the current gaming state is a small hit. While the state, the big hit state, the first specific gaming state, the small hit RUSH state (second specific gaming state), and the third specific gaming state, the right-handed display 658 (described later) is continuously displayed on the display device 4.
1 is displayed.

[Hits command processing]
FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit command processing according to the third embodiment. The effect control device 300 executes a winning command process (B1208) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 92).

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE portion of the received winning command represents a fanfare (B2101). Hit command is fanfare command (A
5714, A5814) or small hit fanfare command (A5735, A5835)
In this case, the MODE part represents a fanfare. The fanfare command includes information on the maximum number of rounds per jackpot. The round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol-related command (decorative symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

The production control device 300 is configured so that the MODE part of the hit command represents a fanfare (B
2101 is “Y”), whether or not the hit command is due to irregular small hits, that is, whether or not the hit command is a small hit fanfare command received due to occurrence of irregular small hits. Determine (B2102).

The production control device 300 is a case where the hit command is not due to irregular small hits (
When the result of B2102 is “N”), the fanfare effect setting process for setting the fanfare effect is executed (B2103). The fanfare effect is a small hit fanfare effect when a small hit fanfare command is received, or a big hit fanfare effect when a fanfare command is received. Subsequently, the fanfare is set to the game state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2104),
The hit command processing ends.

As described above, the irregular small hit is a case where the result of the special figure variation display game started based on the winning of the game ball in the secondary start area (sub area) is a small hit. A small hit. In addition, the effect control device 300 receives, for example, a special figure fluctuation display game of a special figure type (for example, special figure 2) different from the main fluctuation display game (for example, special figure 1 fluctuation display game) corresponding to the current gaming state. When it becomes, it can be determined as an irregular small hit.

On the other hand, when the hit command is an irregular small hit (result of B2102 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 does not set the fanfare effect and does not execute the small hit fanfare effect in step B2104. Execute the process.

When the MODE part of the received winning command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the winning command represents a round ( B2105). The winning command is a round command (A6102
) Or a small hit releasing command (A6902, A6909, A6916, A6923), the MODE portion represents a round.

The production control device 300 indicates that the MODE part represents a round (the result of B2105 is “Y”).
), Whether or not the hit system command is due to irregular small hits, that is, whether or not the hit system command is a small hit open command received due to the occurrence of irregular small hits (B2106). When the hit command is not due to irregular small hit (B
The result of 2106 is “N”), and a round effect setting process for setting a round effect is executed (
B2107). When a command for opening a small hit is received, the round effect is a small hit during a big winning opening with a small hit, or when a round command is received, it is a big hit round during a big hit round. . Subsequently, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 (P
The game status flag indicating (machine status) is set to round (B2108), and the hit command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hit command is an irregular small hit (result of B2106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 does not set the round effect and does not execute the effect during the small hit in step B2108. Execute the process.

In the case where the MODE portion of the received winning command does not represent a round (result of B2105 is “N”), the rendering control device 300 determines that the winning command MOD
It is determined whether part E represents an interval (B2109). If the winning command is an interval command, the MODE part represents the interval. In the present embodiment, since the big winning opening is opened only once in the small hit (see FIG. 69), that is,
Since the small hit is one round, there is no interval command. However, even in the case of a small hit, an interval command exists in a configuration in which the big winning opening is opened and closed a plurality of times.

The production control device 300 indicates that the MODE part represents an interval (the result of B2109 is “
Y "), whether or not the hit command is due to irregular small hits, that is, whether or not the hit command is a command received due to occurrence of irregular small hits (
B2110). When the hit system command is not due to irregular small hits (B2110
The result of “N”), an interval effect setting process for setting a big hit (or small hit) interval effect is executed, and the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 indicates that the interval is in progress. Set (B2111, B2112), and the hit command processing ends.

When the MODE portion of the received winning command does not represent an interval (the result of B2109 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion of the winning command represents ending ( B2113). The winning command is the ending command (A6
307) or the small hit end screen command (A7001), the MODE portion represents the ending.

The production control device 300 shows that when the MODE part of the hit command represents ending (B2
113 is “Y”), whether or not the hit system command is due to irregular small hits, that is, whether or not the hit system command is a small hit end screen command received due to the occurrence of irregular small hits. Is determined (B2114). If the winning command is not an irregular small hit (result of B2114 is “N”), an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect is executed (B2115). The ending effect is a small hitting ending effect at the end of the small hit when receiving the small hit end screen command (display effect of the small hit end screen), and when the ending command is received, the big hit ending at the end of the big hit Production (displaying effect of the big hit end screen). Ending is set in the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2116), and the hit command processing is terminated.

The production control device 300 is a case where the hit command is an irregular small hit (
If the result of B2114 is “Y”), the small hitting ending effect is not set, and the display effect of the small hitting end screen is not executed, and the process of step B2116 is executed.

If the MODE portion of the received winning command does not indicate an ending (result of B2113 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the winning command processing without executing any processing.

Note that the above-described small hitting fanfare effect, small hitting medium effect, small hitting interval effect, and small hitting ending effect are collectively referred to as a small hitting effect. The small hit effect is an effect executed due to the small hit. Also, the above jackpot fanfare production, jackpot round production,
The jackpot interval effect and the jackpot ending effect are collectively called the jackpot effect.

FIG. 147A is a table exemplifying the presence / absence of a small hit effect and a big hit effect by such a hit system command process with respect to the normal gaming state (left-handed state). FIG. 147B shows the presence / absence of the small hit effect and the big hit effect by the hit system command processing, the small hit RUSH state (right-handed state)
It is a table illustrated with respect to.

In the normal gaming state, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game becomes the main fluctuation display game, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes the follow fluctuation display game. In the small hit RUSH state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes the main fluctuation display game, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game becomes the secondary fluctuation display game.

In FIG. 147A and FIG. 147B, when the result of the main variation display game is a small hit result in the first period, which is the display time of the stop symbol, in the second period after the first period, the small hit effect (small Hit fanfare effect, mid-hit effect, small hit ending effect, etc.) are executed. On the other hand, if the result of the follow-up display game is a small hit result in the first period, the small hit effect is not executed in the second period after the first period. Here, the second period is
This is the duration of the small hit state.

Then, only when the result of the main variation display game is a small hit result (in the case of a normal small hit), as a part of the small hit effect, a congratulatory effect for congratulating and notifying the occurrence of the small hit state is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the follow-up display game is a small hit result (in the case of an irregular small hit)
Since the small hit effect is not executed, the blessing effect is not executed. For this reason, the player can enjoy the game in an original way of enjoying (launching, launching mode) in which the game ball is launched aiming at the main starting area, and the lowering of the interest of the game can be prevented.

In addition, when performing a blessing effect in the case of an irregular small hit, in order to launch a game ball aiming at a follower start area where entry of game balls is not recommended in an attempt to generate a lot of follow-up display games, In addition to being able to enjoy the game in the recommended way of enjoying the game (how to hit, how to fire), there are many error notifications (such as “please make a left turn”). Therefore, if the blessing effect is executed in the case of an irregular small hit, there is a possibility that the interest of the game is lowered.

Further, in FIG. 147A and FIG. 147B, when the result of either the main variation display game or the sub variation display game becomes a big hit result in the first period which is the display time of the stop symbol,
In the second period after the period, a jackpot effect (a jackpot fanfare effect, a jackpot round effect, an interval effect, a jackpot ending effect, etc.) is executed. Here, the second period is a continuation period of the big hit state. Note that the types of jackpots include jackpot 1 and jackpot 2 according to the probability state after the jackpot and the number of rounds. For example, the big hit 1 and the big hit 2 may be a normal big hit and a probable big hit, respectively, and may be a 4R big hit and a 16R big hit (see FIG. 119). Different jackpot effects (one jackpot effect and two jackpot effects) may be executed for each type of jackpot.

In addition, in FIG. 147A and FIG. 147B, when the result of either one or both of the main variation display game and the sub variation display game becomes an outlier result in the first period which is the display time of the stop symbol, the first period In the subsequent second period, the effect corresponding to the result of the loss is not executed. In this case, if one of the main variation display game and the sub variation display game that can be executed simultaneously (both) is forcedly stopped by one small hit result,
The second period is at least the duration of the small hit state. In addition, when one of the main variation display game and the sub variation display game is forcibly stopped due to one jackpot result, the second
The period is at least the duration of the big hit state. When the results of both the main variation display game and the sub variation display game are out of play, the second period is a period until at least one of the variation display games is started after the first period.

In the example of FIGS. 146 and 147 described above, in the irregular small hit where the follow-up display game is a small hit, the small hit fanfare effect, the small hit effect, and the interval effect (multiple prize winning openings are opened and closed). Only), all the small hit effects of the small hit ending effect are not executed. However, in the case of irregular small hits, the ones that do not include the blessing effect (multiple) of the small hit fanfare effect, the small hit effect, the interval effect, and the small hit ending effect are displayed during the duration of the small hit state (No. 1). It is also possible to perform the configuration in such a manner that it is executed during two periods. For example, if the small hit ending production does not include the blessing production,
Only a small hitting ending effect for a relatively short period of time can be executed to notify the small hitting and enhance the interest of the game.

In the example of FIGS. 146 and 147, the big hit effect is executed even in an irregular big hit where the follow-up display game is a big hit. However, in the irregular jackpot, a configuration in which only the blessing effect that congratulates and informs of the occurrence of the jackpot is not performed among the jackpot effects is possible (a jackpot effect other than the blessing effect is executed).

By the way, in the third embodiment, unlike the first and second embodiments, the special figure 2 start winning memory (special figure 2 start memory) is configured to accumulate up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of 1 or more. It is assumed that the special figure 2 start winning is not invalidated while the two-variable display game is being executed or during a big hit. For this reason, the special figure starting port 2 switch process, the special figure 2 ordinary process, and the variation start information setting process are changed from the first embodiment and the second embodiment as follows.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure start port 2 switch process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special-purpose start port 2 switch process (A2718) in the start port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first loads the start port 2 signal output count, which is the number of times that information related to the number of wins to the start port 2 switch 37a is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 (A3001). Furthermore, the value of the loaded start port 2 signal output count is updated by +1 (A3
002), it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A3003).

When the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A3003 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the updated value in the start port 2 signal output number area of the RWM (A3004).
). On the other hand, when the output count overflows (the result of A3003 is “Y”), the process of step A3005 is executed without executing the process of step A3004.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure hold (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A3005). If the special figure hold number is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A3005 is “N”), the special figure start port 2 switch process is terminated.

The game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 information setting flag (A3006) and updates the special figure 2 hold number by +1 when the special figure hold number is less than the upper limit (the result of A3005 is “Y”). (A3007). It should be noted that the special figure 2 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including prefetch variation pattern distribution).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (A3008), and uses the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process as the big hit random number storage area of the RWM. (A3009). Subsequently, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A3010), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the RWM jackpot symbol random number storage area (A3).
011). Further, the small hitting design random number is extracted and saved in the small hitting design random number storage area of the RWM (A3012). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area (variation pattern random number 1 storage area, variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) of the RWM ( A3013).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure hold information determination process (prefetch process, pre-determination process) for determining the special figure hold information (A3014), and the special figure 2 hold number indicating the special figure 2 hold number. A command (decoration special figure 2 number-of-holds command) is prepared as an effect command (A3015), an effect command setting process is executed (A3016), and the special figure start port 2 switch process is terminated. Thus, the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 when the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) occurs.

In the third embodiment, the special figure hold information determination process is also executed for the second start memory (the special figure 2 start memory) generated based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning port 37. Become.
Therefore, the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop symbol command) and the pre-reading variation system command (prefetching variation pattern command) for the special figure 2 start memory (special diagram 2 hold) are stored in the game control device 1.
00 to the effect control device 300.

[Special Figure 2 Regular Processing]
FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 routine processing according to the third embodiment.
The game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 routine process (A3311) in the special figure 2 game process. The processes other than steps A3605a and A3605b are the same as the special figure 2 ordinary process (FIG. 36) of the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

After the special figure 2 variation start process (A3605), the game control device 100 prepares a special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number as an effect command (A3605a). Then, the effect command setting process is executed (A3605b).

Therefore, in the third embodiment, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, a decoration special figure 2 hold number command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing a procedure of change start information setting processing according to the third embodiment. The game control apparatus 100 executes the change start information setting process (A3707, A3807) in the special figure 1 change start process and the special figure 2 change start process. Step A5021,
Processes other than A5022 and A5023 are the change start information setting process of the first embodiment (FIG. 50).
The description is omitted.

When information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5017 is “N”),
That is, when information about the special figure 2 variable display game is being set, the special figure 2 hold number is updated by -1 (A5021), and the contents of the random number storage area related to the special figure 2 variable display game are shifted (A50).
22) Clear the vacant area after the shift (A5023), and end the change start information setting process.

[Screen transition 1]
FIG. 151A and FIG. 151B are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series with respect to the third embodiment. In the normal gaming state, normal small hits and irregular small hits occur. Show.

151A is a display screen immediately before the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game) that becomes the main fluctuation display game in the normal gaming state. In the fluctuation display area 610 at the center of the display screen, the previous stop game “3, 4, 6” of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is displayed large. In addition, in the fluctuation display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the previous stop game “3, 4, 6” of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is also displayed small. In the fluctuation display area 615 at the right end of the display screen, a special figure 2 fluctuation display game (decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game) that becomes a sub fluctuation display game in the normal gaming state is variably displayed.

In (a), the first predetermined image 675 indicating the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped. The second predetermined image 676 showing the execution state of the two-variable display game is a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 variable-display game is being executed (being changed). The second predetermined image 676 “◯” may blink as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol). In the first display unit 620 of the display screen, the special figure 1 hold display 620a (special figure) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory), which is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game (main fluctuation display game). Four (1 start memory display) are displayed. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. The special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number “4”, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number “4”. Since the game is in the normal gaming state, a left-handed display 65 for recommending left-handed to the player.
6 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

Subsequently, in (a), the special figure 1 fluctuation display game as the main fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game as the sub fluctuation display game are both in the running state. Also, the first predetermined image 675
Is a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, and the second predetermined image 676 is a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. It has become. The first predetermined image 675 “◯” and the second predetermined image 676 “◯” are the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).
You may blink as.

In (a), in the first display unit 620, each special figure 1 hold display 620a has moved to the display position of the left special figure 1 hold display 620a (hold shift). Furthermore, the special figure 1 hold display 620a located at the left end of the first display unit 620 is transferred from the first display unit 620 to the hold digestion area 6.
Move to 40 (hold shift). The special figure 1 hold display 620a of the first display unit 620 is a start memory display (pre-change hold display) corresponding to the start memory related to the change display game before execution, whereas the special figure of the hold digestion area 640 is shown. The 1-hold display 620a is a start-up storage display (a hold-in-change display) corresponding to the start-up memory related to the currently running change-display game. The special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number “3”, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number “4”.

The special figure 1 variable display game that is the main variable display game is displayed in a plurality of modes (two modes) of the first display mode and the second display mode. Here, the first display mode is a larger display mode than the second display mode, and is a mode in which the first display mode is displayed larger in the center of the display screen as the main display. The second display mode is the edge of the display screen as the sub display. This is a display mode that is displayed small at the part (here, the left end part). That is, the fluctuating decorative symbol is a large symbol in the first display mode and a small symbol in the second display mode. Note that the first display mode may be a mode in which decorative symbols are formed by characters, numbers, and frames and displayed in a variable manner, and the second display mode may be a mode in which decorative symbols are formed only by numbers and displayed in a variable manner. .

The special figure 2 variable display game, which is a follow variable display game, is displayed at the right end of the display screen as a sub display smaller than the special figure 1 variable display game of the first display mode as the main display. That is, the decorative pattern which fluctuates is a large symbol in the special figure 1 variable display game of the first display mode, and a small symbol in the special figure 2 variable display game. In the display mode (small symbol mode) of the special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative pattern (color and size) of the same type (for example, only numbers) as the special figure 1 variable display game in the second display mode (sub display) May be different), or may be a decorative pattern (color and shape may be different) of the same size as the special display 1 variation display game of the second display mode, or the special feature of the second display mode. It may be a decorative pattern (the size may be different) of the same shape, although the color is different from the variation display game in FIG. Here, the same size means that the vertical width and the horizontal width are the same, or the point (pt) of the character (number) of the decorative design is the same.

After that, in (c), the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, which is the main fluctuation display game, becomes the small hit result, and the small hit symbol (small hit stop symbol) “7, 6, 7” is derived, and the display screen A large symbol is displayed at the top. The small hit here is a normal small hit. The small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” is first displayed in the center of the display screen corresponding to the first display mode (main display) of the special figure 1 variable display game, and then the small hit fanfare. It may be moved to the upper part of the display screen and displayed smaller so as not to interfere with the production. Corresponding to the second display mode (sub-display) of the special figure 1 variable display game, the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” is displayed small in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen.

In addition, when the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game which is the main fluctuation display game becomes the small hit result, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which is the sub fluctuation display game is displayed in the fluctuation display area 615 at the right end portion of the display screen. It is forcibly stopped (forced stop) at the loss result, i.e., the loss symbol "1, 6, 7".

In (c), because of a normal small hit, a small hit fanfare effect is executed at the center of the display screen as a small hit effect. As part of the small hit fanfare production,
“Congratulations on small hits”, a blessing effect is performed to congratulate and announce the occurrence of small hits. In addition,
As a blessing effect, an effect in which a character appears and congratulates may be executed. Also,
As a small hit fanfare production, “Tiger Mode” as a production mode corresponding to the small hit state
It is notified that “rushing into tiger mode”.

And since it is a small hit state, in order to recommend a right strike to the player, a right strike display 657
Is displayed in a large mode (first mode, maximum mode) at the upper right of the display screen, and a right-handed display 658 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen in a small mode (second mode) different from the right-handed display 657. Mode, minimum mode). As will be described later, right-handed display 657 and right-handed display 6
58 is displayed on the display screen in the same manner even when the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit result, it may be displayed in a different manner.

Note that the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “
The second predetermined image 676 is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640.

Subsequently, in (d), a small hit effect is executed at the center of the display screen as a small hit effect. The small hit effect is an effect corresponding to the effect mode “tiger mode”. In addition, "tiger mode"
Mode may be set as one mode of the normal gaming state after the end of the small hit, and since the mode continues, the mode name “tiger mode” may be displayed at the end or corner of the display screen.
Although not shown, a small hit ending effect is executed at the end of the small hit state.

Thereafter, in (e), the small hit state ends and the normal gaming state starts. The small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” displayed at the top of the display screen returns to the central portion of the display screen, and is enlarged and displayed large. And the special figure 1 variable display game used as the main variable display game starts in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 613 by the main display and the sub display. At the same time, the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a follow variable display game, starts in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen.

In the first display unit 620, each special figure 1 hold display 620a is a special figure 1 hold display 62 on the left side.
It has moved to the display position of 0a (holding shift). Further, the special figure 1 hold display 620a located at the left end of the first display unit 620 is moved from the first display unit 620 to the hold digestion area 640 and displayed as a change hold display (hold shift). The special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number “2”, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number “3”.
Is displayed.

In (e), the first predetermined image 675 is displayed when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed (during fluctuation).
The second predetermined image 676 is a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed (fluctuating). First predetermined image 675 “
“◯” and the second predetermined image 676 “◯” may blink as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol). Further, since the small hit state is ended and the normal gaming state, the left-handed display 656 for recommending the left-handed to the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

  The following (f) is in the same state as (b) except that the number of holds is different.

Thereafter, in (ki), the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a follow variable display game, becomes the small hit result, and the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” is derived, and the variable display area at the right end of the display screen 61
5 is displayed small. On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a sub-variable display game, becomes a small hit result, the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen and the variable display area 613 at the left end of the main display A special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped at a loss result (specific result), that is, a loss symbol “1, 5, 6” (forced stop). In addition, the outlier symbol as a specific result of the variable display game is a symbol other than the small hit symbol and the big hit symbol,
Includes chance eye symbol and default symbol. The default symbol is a predetermined symbol (“1,
2, 3 ", etc.). The chance eye symbol is a special off-line symbol that can be displayed as a result of a plurality of variable display games in a continuous notice as a pre-reading effect.

In (ki), the off symbol “1, 5, 6” corresponding to the off result (specific result) of the main fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) is displayed at the center of the display screen. game(
The small hit symbol “7, 6, corresponding to the small hit result (first special result) of the special figure 2 variable display game)
7 ”is displayed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying as if the main variation display game had a small hit result. The main variation display game is frequently executed, but the small hit result (small hit symbol) of the sub variable display game that is not frequently executed suddenly occurs.
If it is displayed prominently, the player may misidentify as if the main variation display game that had been displayed prominently had a small hit result. In addition, although the small hit symbol has regularity of numbers (here, two symbols “7” are aligned), it is difficult to understand the difference from the loss symbol, so the main variation display game is small even though it is a loss symbol. It is easy to misunderstand that it was a hit.

In (ki), unlike (c), since it is an irregular small hit, the small hit effect including the blessing effect that congratulates and notifies the occurrence of the small hit is not executed. The small hit effect does not include the display itself of the small hit symbol (small hit stop symbol) “7, 6, 7”. Since the blessing performance is not executed at irregular small hits, the player enjoys the game in the recommended original way of enjoying, that is, the left-handed or right-handed hitting method (launch mode) aiming at the main starting area. It becomes like this.

Note that the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “
The second predetermined image 676 is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640.

And in (Ki), since it is a small hit state, in order to recommend a right strike to the player, only the right strike display 658 is displayed in a small mode (second mode) in the lower right corner of the display screen. Is done. The right-handed display 657 (first mode) is not displayed. Further, when a small hit state due to irregular small hits occurs in this way, the right-handed display 658 is more conspicuous than the right-handed display 657 (first mode) in a big hit state as described below ((C)). It is displayed in a mode that is not (small mode). For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying the main fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) that is displayed largely in the first display mode as if a right-handed state has occurred due to a small hit.

Further, in the case of such irregular small hits, a display of contents common to the case where the main variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) results in a loss is displayed on the display device (FIG. 15 described later).
(See also 2 (T) and (T)). As the display of the common contents, the special figure 1 hold display 620a, the special figure 1 hold number display 650, the special figure 2 hold number display 660, and the first execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game are shown.
There is a predetermined image 675 and a second predetermined image 676 showing the execution state of the special figure 2 variable display game.

In addition, although not shown, there is a character that appears at the time of temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous effect (when the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed) as a display of common contents. It should be noted that the pseudo continuous effect is a pseudo variation in which the decorative special symbol that is variably displayed is tentatively stopped (pseudo stop display) during the period from the start to the end of one special diagram variation display game. This is an effect performed continuously a predetermined number of times. In addition,
In the temporary stop display, a pseudo-continuous pattern suggesting the continuation of the pseudo-continuous production is stopped and displayed.

Even if a small hit state is caused by the follow variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) due to the display of the common contents as described above, the player can play the main variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) that appears frequently. ), The same display as that at the time of the result of the deviation is seen, so there is no sense of incongruity and there is less confusion with the small hit state due to the sudden change display game (special figure 2 change display game).

In (ki), a special figure 1 hold display 620a which is a start memory display corresponding to the start memory that is the right to execute the main fluctuation display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is displayed on the display screen. Accordingly, even when the result of the sub-variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is a small hit result, the start memory display for the main variable display game can be continuously displayed on the display device.
For this reason, it is possible to prevent the start memory display for the follow-up variation display game from being displayed on the display device and being confused in response to the result of the follow-up variation display game being a small hit result.

Thereafter, in (ku), the irregular small hit state ends and the normal gaming state starts. The hold shift is executed, and the off symbol “1, 5, 5” displayed at the center of the display screen is displayed.
6 "starts to change. And the special figure 1 variable display game used as the main variable display game starts in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 613 by the main display and the sub display. At the same time, the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a follow variable display game, starts in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen.

Note that the game control device 100 has a period of time from the start of the irregular small hit state of (ki) in FIG. 151 to the start of the normal game state (next change start) of (ku) (irregular small hit digestion time). ) Is longer than the time from the start of the normal small hit state in (c) to the start of the normal gaming state (start of next fluctuation) in (e) (normal small hit digestion time = normal small hit digestion time) It may be set. That is, irregular small per-digestion time = normal small per-digestion time + α. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player using the extra time α that an irregular small hit, which is an unintentional (not recommended) small hit, has occurred.

The normal small hitting digestion time is the aforementioned small hitting fanfare time (A6003a, A
6003b), small hit opening time (A6906, etc.), small hit remaining ball processing time (A7006, etc.), and small hit ending time (A7104, A7107). For example, in the case of irregular small hits, in the small hit end processing (FIG. 72, FIG. 73), a process for saving the time α in the special game processing timer area is added, thereby adding extra time to the normal small hitting time. It is possible to make the irregular small per unit digestion time by adding a small time α. Note that the normal small hit digestion time is the time during the small hit state, but the extra time α is the time from the end of the small hit state to the start of the next fluctuation.

The game control device 100 transmits information (a signal related to the start of the small hit) to the external information terminal 71 when the irregular small hit occurs (A60).
04a, A6004b), even when the extra time α is transmitted again to the external information terminal 71, two types of information, that is, information indicating that a small hit has occurred and information indicating that the small hit is irregular are transmitted to the external information terminal 71. Good. For example, in the small hit end process (FIGS. 72 and 73), the extra time α can be obtained by executing the process of saving the two types of information in the external information output data area.
The two types of information can be transmitted to the external information terminal 71. In this way, information indicating that the small hit is irregular, that is, the irregular small hit, is provided to an external device (such as a data display or a hall computer provided in the gaming machine 10) via the external information terminal 71. Information indicating that an occurrence has occurred can be notified that an irregular small hit, which is a small hit, has occurred. Note that only information indicating that the small hit is irregular may be transmitted to the external information terminal 71 during the extra time α.

The special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number “1”, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number “2”. Further, since the small hit state is ended and the normal gaming state, the left-handed display 656 for recommending the left-handed to the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

  The following (K) is in the same state as (A) and (F) except that the number of holds is different.

After that, in (ko), the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game which is the main fluctuation display game becomes the big hit result, and the big hit symbol (big hit stop symbol) “3, 3, 3” is derived and is displayed at the center of the display screen. Largely displayed as a large symbol. The big hit here is a normal big hit. Corresponding to the second display mode (sub-display) of the special figure 1 variable display game, the big hit symbol “3, 3, 3” is displayed small in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen.

In addition, when the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game which is the main fluctuation display game becomes the big hit result, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which is the sub fluctuation display game is the result of the loss, that is, the off symbol “9, 2, 6 ”To forcibly stop (forced stop).

In (co), a big hit fanfare effect is executed at the center of the display screen as a big hit effect. As part of the jackpot fanfare production, the text display “Congratulations on the jackpot!
! ”And a blessing effect that congratulates and informs of the occurrence of the jackpot is executed. It should be noted that the blessing effect that the character appears and blesses may be executed in the case of normal small hit (c), but the big blessing effect that the character appears and blesses is normal small It may be executed in the same manner as in the case of winning (c) or in a different manner. In addition, if it is a different aspect, the distinction between a big hit and a small hit becomes clear, and if it is the same aspect, commonality will appear in a blessing production and the interest of a game will improve.

And since it is a big hit state, in order to recommend a right strike to the player, a right strike display 657
Is displayed in a large mode (first mode, maximum mode) at the upper right of the display screen, and a right-handed display 658 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen in a small mode (second mode) different from the right-handed display 657. Mode, minimum mode).

In addition, the first predetermined image 675 has a symbol “” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped.
The second predetermined image 676 is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640.

Subsequently, in (sa), a big hit round effect is executed in the center of the display screen as a big hit effect.

In addition, the main fluctuation display game of (c) (co) in FIG. 151A described above (special figure 1 fluctuation display game)
In the normal small hit or normal big hit, in the fluctuation display area 615 at the right end of the display screen, the follow fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is out of place ("1, 6, 7", "9, 2, 6"). However, in the normal small hit or normal big hit of the main variation display game, the sub variation display game is interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the variation time by the timer. In this case, the derivation of the result of the follow-up variable display game is postponed, but the follow-up display game in the change display area 615 may be apparently continued due to shaking fluctuations during the small hit state or the big hit state. It should be noted that, after the small hit state, measurement of the variation time by the timer is resumed for the sub-variable display game.

Similarly, in the irregular small hit of the follow-up variable display game (see FIG. 2) in FIG. 151A described above, the change display area 610 at the center of the display screen and the change display area 613 at the left end are displayed. , The main variation display game (Special Figure 1 variation display game) is out of the design ("1, 5,
6 ") and is forcibly stopped (forced stop). However, the main variation display game may be interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the variation time by the timer. In this case, the derivation of the result of the main variation display game is postponed, but the main variation display game in the variation display area 610 and the variation display area 613 may be apparently continued due to fluctuations in the swing state. After the small hit state, the measurement of the variation time by the timer is resumed for the main variation display game.

As the first display mode of the main variation display game being interrupted in the variation display area 610 (during the small hit state of the sub-variable display game), a mode in which shaking variation (temporary stop) is performed with a large symbol, Although there is a mode in which the rotation is changed, the scroll (change in the vertical direction of the display screen) before the interruption may be continued even during the interruption. The second display mode of the main variation display game during suspension in the variation display area 613 (during the small hit state of the sub-variable display game) includes a mode in which fluctuation variation or rotation variation is performed with small symbols. You may continue and perform the aspect which is performing the previous scroll.

In the first specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state of FIG. 116, when a normal small hit and an irregular small hit occur, it is basically the same as FIGS. 151A and 151B, and the main variation display The special figure 1 variable display game that is a game is displayed in two modes: a first display mode (main display) of the variable display area 610 and a second display mode (sub-display) of the variable display area 613.
The special figure 2 variable display game, which is a follow variable display game, has a variable display area 615 at the end of the display screen.
Is displayed. In the first specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state, since the general electric winning port of the normal variation winning device 33 is the main starting region, the player enters the first starting winning port 36 (subordinate starting region). Even if the special figure 1 variable display game executed based on is a small hit, the small hit effect (including the blessing effect) is not executed. For example, (U) (
In the case of d), assuming that this is an irregular small hit instead of a normal small hit, the character display “Tiger mode entry”, “Congratulations on small hits”, and “Tiger mode” and the large right-handed display 657 are not displayed. The small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” in the main display may not be displayed.

[Another example of irregular small hits 1]
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing another example 1 of irregular small hits.

152 (t) is a continuation of FIG. 151A (f) and is a main variation display game.
The result of the variation display game is a loss result, and the variation symbol “8, 4, 3” is displayed in the variation display area 610 at the center of the display screen. Also, in the fluctuation display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the special stop game “8, 4, 3” of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is displayed small. The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “×” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped.
The second predetermined image 676 is a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. The second predetermined image 676 “◯” may blink as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

Subsequently, (H) is the same as (A) in FIG. The special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number “1”, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660
The current special figure 2 hold number “3” is displayed.

Thereafter, in (tsu), the result of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main fluctuation display game, becomes a result of losing, and the detachment symbol “2, 5, 1” is displayed in the fluctuation display area 610 in the center of the display screen. Has been. Also, in the fluctuation display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the special stop game “2, 5, 1” of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is displayed small. Others are the same as (Ta).

Subsequently, (te) is the same as (h) except for the number of holds. Special Figure 1 Number of Holds Displayed 65
0 displays the number of current special figure 1 hold “0”, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2
The number of holds “3” is displayed.

Thereafter, in (g), an irregular small hit occurs as in (g) of FIG. 151B.
(G) is the same as (G) only in the number of holds.

Next, in (na), the irregular small hit state ends and the normal gaming state starts. However, since the current number of special figure 1 suspension is “0”, unlike FIG. 151B (ku), the special figure 1 fluctuation display game which is the main fluctuation display game has a fluctuation display area 610 and a fluctuation display area 61.
3 is not started, and the state where the off symbol “1, 5, 6” is stopped and displayed at the center portion and the left end portion of the display screen is maintained. However, the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a follow variable display game, starts in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen.

The special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number “0”, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number “2”. Further, since the small hit state is ended and the normal gaming state, the left-handed display 656 for recommending the left-handed to the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

Similar to the above and FIG. 151, the game control apparatus 100 is from the start of the irregular small hit state in (g) of FIG. 152 to the start of (n) the normal game state (start of next fluctuation). The time from the start of the normal small hit state in FIG. 151 (c) to the start of the normal gaming state (start of next fluctuation) in FIG. Per digestion time or normal small per digestion time). That is, irregular small per-digestion time = normal small per-digestion time + α. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player using the extra time α that an irregular small hit, which is an unintentional (not recommended) small hit, has occurred.

[Another example of irregular small hits 2]
FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating another example 2 of irregular small hits. Another example 2 of irregular small hits corresponds to a case where (ki) in FIG. 151B is replaced by (ki-1) to (ki-4) in FIG. 153.

(Ki-1) in FIG. 153 is the same as (ki) in FIG. 151B, but the result of the special figure 2 variation display game (subordinate variation display game) is the small hit result, and the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7 ”is derived and displayed in a small size in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen. On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (following fluctuation display game) becomes a small hit result, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (main fluctuation display game) is displayed in the fluctuation display area 613 at the left end of the display screen. It is forcibly stopped (forced stop) at a loss result (specific result), that is, a small error symbol “1, 5, 6” in the sub display (second display mode). It should be noted that in the fluctuation display area 610 at the center of the display screen, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game missed result (specific result), that is, a large missed pattern “1, 5, 6” in the main display (first display mode). Is not displayed.

In this way, when the result of the follow-up variation display game is an irregular small hit that results in a small hit result, the main variation display game is terminated and the main variation display game is regarded as a loss result, and the loss result is displayed as the first display mode. It is not displayed in (large aspect), but is displayed on the display screen in the second display aspect (small aspect). Therefore, in the case of an irregular small hit, there is no misperception that the main variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) displayed largely on the main display has a small hit result.

The main variation display game is frequently executed, while the sub variation display game is rarely executed and is changed for a long time. Since it is difficult to understand the difference between the small hit symbol and the off symbol, it is easy to misunderstand that the main variation display game is a small hit despite the fact that it is a loss symbol. For this reason, in the case of an irregular small hit, there is a possibility that the player will misunderstand as if the main variation display game that was displayed conspicuously becomes a small hit result.

The main variation display game may be interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the variation time by the timer due to the irregular small hit, but it is interrupted in the variation display area 613 (the small hit state of the sub-variable display game) The main variation display game mode (second display mode) in the middle) is a mode in which a small symbol swings (temporarily stops), a mode in which a small symbol rotates, and the same scrolling as before the interruption. There are aspects.

Next, (Ki-2) is a display screen when the small hit state for irregular small hits ends and the normal gaming state starts. A left-handed display 656 for recommending left-handed to the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. In addition, bowl-shaped concealment images 651a and 651 that can conceal other images.
1b appears to move so as to close.

In addition, the hold shift is executed, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number “1”, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 shows the current special figure 2 hold number. The number “2” is displayed. Further, the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed, and the second predetermined image 676 is a special figure 2 fluctuation display game being executed. The symbol “○” is shown.

It should be noted that the small small hit symbol “7,6,7” at the right end of the display screen and the small off symbol “1,5,6” at the left end are preferentially placed on the upper layer (front side )
The concealed images 651a and 651b are different from the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7”.
“1, 5, 6” is not concealed, but may be concealed. Also, the hidden images 651a, 6
51b is a special figure 1 hold display 620a, a hold digestion area 640 (including a changing hold display), a special figure 1 hold number display 650, a special figure 2 hold number display 660, a first predetermined image 675, and a second predetermined image 67.
6 is not concealed, but one or more of these may be concealed.

Subsequently, in (ki-3) immediately after, the bowl-shaped hidden images 651a and 651b are completely closed,
The two hidden images 651a and 651b are in contact with each other. Further, in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game is changed in the sub display (second display mode). In the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen, the special figure 2 variable display game, which becomes the follow variable display game, is changing in a small manner.

Note that the bowl-shaped hidden images 651a and 651b are preferentially displayed in the upper layer (front side), and the special display 1 variable display game of the main display is displayed in the lower layer (back side). The concealed images 651a and 651b conceal the main display special figure 1 variable display game (concealment effect). For this reason, in the fluctuation display area 610 at the center of the display screen, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game which is the main fluctuation display game is not displayed in the main display (first display mode).
Since it is not conspicuous, it is not necessary to conceal the special figure 1 variable display game (sub display) in the fluctuation display area 613 at the left end and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the fluctuation display area 615 at the right end.

Subsequently, immediately after (ki-4), the bowl-shaped concealed images 651a and 651b are opened and displayed with a space therebetween, and the special display 1 variation display of the main display from the gap between the two concealed images 651a and 651b. A part of the game is displayed and can be seen. As a part of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display of the middle symbol “5” is displayed among the missing symbols “1, 5, 6” which have started to fluctuate.

Thereafter, (ku) in FIG. 153 is the same as FIG. 151B and (ku), but the cocoon-shaped hidden image 6 is displayed.
51a and 651b are completely opened and erased. And all of the special display 1 fluctuation display games of the main display are displayed and can be visually recognized.

In addition, when the variation starts suddenly from (K-1) like (K), the main display losing symbol “1, 5, 6” suddenly appears and the variation starts, so the player feels uncomfortable. . However, in (ki-2) to (ki-4) of FIG. 153, after the end of the small hit state due to the irregular small hit, the saddle-like concealed images 651a and 651b are the special display 1 of the main display immediately after the start.
By executing the concealment effect that conceals the variable display game, the player feels less uncomfortable.

In (K-1), a predetermined image may be displayed before the bowl-shaped hidden images 651a and 651b are displayed. For example, the predetermined image is a character image (for example, “Irregular!” Etc.) for notifying that it is an irregular small hit, or a normal game (special figure variation display game)
It is also possible to display a character image (for example, “Please wait a bit!” Etc.) for notifying that the game stops, that is, that the progress of the normal game is delayed due to the occurrence of a small hit. This also leads to a reduction in player discomfort.

[Example 3 of irregular small hits (switching effect 1)]
FIG. 154 is a diagram showing another example 3 (switching effect 1) for irregular small hits. Another example 3 of irregular small hits is (ki-1) to (ki-4) in FIG. 153 to (ki-a) in FIG.
To (key d).

154 (Key a) is the same as (Key) in FIG. 151B and (Key-1) in FIG. 153, but unlike (Key) (Key-1), the main display is displayed at the center of the display screen. As the (first display mode), the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (following fluctuation display game) is displayed large. Moreover, in addition to the right-handed display 658 of the small mode (second mode) in the lower right corner of the display screen, it corresponds to the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” displayed large in the center of the display screen. Then, a right-handed display 657 of a large aspect (first aspect, maximum aspect) is displayed on the upper right of the display screen.

Subsequently, (key b) is the same as (key -2) in FIG. 153, but unlike (key -2),
The large small hit symbols “7, 6, 7” of the main display (first display mode) are concealed by the bowl-shaped concealment images 651a and 651b that appear while moving so as to be closed.

Next, (key c) immediately after is the same as (key-3) in FIG. 153, but the main display (first display mode) is small by the completely closed saddle-shaped concealment images 651a and 651b. Winning symbol "
7, 6, 7 "are completely hidden.

Subsequently, immediately after (key d), the bowl-shaped concealed images 651a and 651b are opened and displayed with a gap therebetween, and the special display 1 fluctuation display of the main display is displayed from the gap between the two concealed images 651a and 651b. A part of the game is displayed and can be seen. Here, as part of the special display 1 fluctuation display game of the main display, out of the off symbol "1, 5, 6" that started the fluctuation,
The change display of the middle symbol “5” is displayed.

When the fluctuation starts suddenly from (key a) like (ku), suddenly, the large small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” of the main display of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (following fluctuation display game) Since the main display of the special figure 1 variation display game (main variation display game) is changed to “1, 5, 6” and the variation starts, the player feels uncomfortable. However, in (key b) to (key d) in FIG. 154, after the small hit state due to the irregular small hit, the saddle-like concealed images 651a and 651b change the special display 1 of the main display immediately after the start. By executing the concealment effect that conceals the display game, the player feels less uncomfortable.

Note that this concealment effect includes an off symbol “1, 5, 6” as an off result (specific result) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (main fluctuation display game), and a special figure 2 fluctuation display game (following fluctuation display game). ) Is a switching effect (switching effect 1) in which the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” as the small hit result (first special result) is switched and displayed on the display screen. In the case of irregular small hits, the main variation display game can be started by switching from the small hit result of the follow variation display game to the main variation display game by switching effect, so the display has continuity and less discomfort. Become.

[Example 4 of irregular small hits (switching effect 2)]
FIG. 155 is a diagram showing another example 4 (switching effect 2) for irregular small hits. Another example 4 of irregular small hits corresponds to a case where (ku) in FIG. 151B is replaced with (ku-1) to (ku-5) in FIG. 155.

  In FIG. 155 (ki), a small hit state due to irregular small hits occurs.

In FIG. 155 (K-1), the first switching effect is executed immediately after the occurrence of the small hit state.
In the first switching effect, the main display losing symbol “1, 5, 6” of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (main fluctuation display game) is changed to the small hit symbol “1” of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (secondary fluctuation display game). 7,
Switch to “6, 7” to display main.

In (K-1), the effect control device 300 displays the special symbol 1 hold display 620a and its reserved digest area 640, and the special symbol 1 variation display game (main variation display game) out of symbol 655a "1,".
5,6 "is added to be pasted on one side surface 652a of a rectangular parallelepiped object that is a 3D object (solid object), and is displayed on the display screen by perspective. Also,
The effect control device 300 displays the special figure 2 hold display 630a and its reserved digest area 640, and the small figure 655b "7, 6, 7" of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (following fluctuation display game) on the side of the rectangular parallelepiped object. It attaches so that it may affix on the side surface 652b adjacent to the right of 652a, and displays it on a display screen by a perspective method. The upper and lower surfaces of the rectangular parallelepiped object are square and the four side surfaces are the same rectangle. The rectangular parallelepiped object is drawn by a two-point perspective method as a perspective method.

Then, the effect control device 300 displays the rectangular parallelepiped object so as to rotate in the forward direction around the vertical center axis of the rectangular parallelepiped. At first, the off symbol 655a “1, 5, 6
Only the side surface 652a of the rectangular parallelepiped object is displayed so that only the right side can be visually recognized, but display is performed such that the rectangular parallelepiped object rotates so that the side surface 652a moves to the left back side (rotation in the forward direction). When the rectangular parallelepiped object is displayed to rotate, the small hit symbol 655b “7, 6, 7” of the side surface 652b is displayed, and finally the small hit symbol 655b “7”
, 6, 7 "only the side surface 652b is displayed. In this way, by the first switching effect, the off symbol 655a “1” is displayed using the rotation display of the 3D object.
, 5, 6 "is switched to the small hit symbol 655b" 7, 6, 7 ".

In addition, the first switching effect is the derivation of the stop state of the decorative symbols as shown in (K-1) (the outlier symbols “1, 5, 6” being stopped and the small hit symbols “7, 6, 7” being stopped) It is not necessary to be executed in the state of being displayed), and it may be executed during the fluctuation immediately before the decorative symbol stops. In this case, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (main fluctuation display game) and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (following fluctuation display game) that are changing are executed in the side surface 652a and the side surface 652b of the rectangular parallelepiped object, respectively. As the side surface 652a and the side surface 652b move due to the rotation of the rectangular parallelepiped object, the display position (variable display area) of the variable display also moves.

Further, when the player hits the left hand in the right handed state (small hit state) in which the right handing of (K-1) is recommended, the right-handed display 657 for returning the right handing to the right handed state (first display) is large. 1)) on the display screen. In this case, the right-handed display 657 may be added and displayed so as to be pasted on the front surface (side surfaces 652a and 652b) of the rectangular parallelepiped object, or the display screen deviates from the side surfaces 652a and 652b regardless of the rectangular parallelepiped object. May be displayed. When the right side display 657 is displayed outside the side surfaces 652a and 652b, a part of the right-handed display 657
a and 652b may be displayed outside the display area, and the other part may be displayed so as to overlap the display areas of the side surfaces 652a and 652b so as to straddle both of the display areas of the side surfaces 652a and 652b.

In addition, as described above, due to irregular small hits, the main variation display game is interrupted by interrupting the measurement (timekeeping) of the variation time by the timer (the derivation of the result of the main variation display game is postponed) However, the interrupted main variation display game may be displayed in a manner that is pasted on the side surface 652a as a specific manner. As a specific mode of the main variation display game, there are a mode in which the swing variation (temporary stop) is performed in the side surface 652a, a mode in which the side 652a is moved in the side surface 652a by a linear or curved scroll, and the like. In addition, after the small hit state, measurement of the variation time (time count) by the timer resumes for the main variation display game,
The main variation display game resumes.

Subsequently, in (K-2), in the small hit state after the end of the first switching effect, the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” of the special figure 2 variable display game (following variable display game) is the main display ( In the first display mode). In addition, in the second display unit 630, the special figure 2 hold display 630a (the special figure 2 start memory display) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (the special figure 2 start memory) corresponding to the execution right of the special figure 2 variable display game is 3 Are displayed. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. Further, a right-handed display 657 and a right-handed display 658 are displayed.

Thereafter, in (K-3), when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is about to start in the normal gaming state immediately after the end of the small hit state, a right-handed display 657 is displayed.
The right-handed display 658 disappears and the left-handed display 656 is displayed.

Subsequently, in (ku-4), the second switching effect is executed while the fluctuations of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game start. In the second switching effect, the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (following fluctuation display game) is changed from the main display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (main fluctuation display game) “ Switch to “1, 5, 6” and display main. A configuration in which the second switching effect is performed during the small hit state instead of the normal gaming state after the small hit state ends is also possible.

In the second switching effect, the effect control device 300 displays the above-described rectangular parallelepiped object so as to rotate in the direction opposite to the first switching effect around the central axis in the vertical direction of the rectangular parallelepiped. Initially, only the side surface 652b of the rectangular parallelepiped object is displayed so that only the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” is visible, but the display is such that the rectangular parallelepiped object rotates so that the side surface 652b moves to the right rear side. (Rotate in the reverse direction). When the rectangular parallelepiped object is displayed to rotate, the small hit symbol 655a “1, 5, 6” of the side surface 652a is displayed, and finally only the small hit symbol 655a “1, 5, 6” is visually recognized. Side 652 so you can
Only a is displayed. In this way, by the second switching effect, using the rotation display of the 3D object, the small hit symbol 655b “7, 6, 7” is disengaged and the symbol 655a “1, 5, 6” is used.
Is switched to.

Note that the second switching effect does not need to be executed during the variation of the decorative symbol as in (K-4), and the decorative symbol is stopped before the variation is started (the off symbol “1, 5, 6 being stopped). ”And the stopped small hit symbol“ 7, 6, 7 ”). In this case, the stop display (stop symbol) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (main fluctuation display game) and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (secondary fluctuation display game) are respectively made by the rotation of the rectangular parallelepiped object.
The display position moves as 2b moves.

In addition to the left-handed display 656, when the player hits the right hand in the left-handed state (normal game state) in which the left-handed (K-4) is recommended, a left-handed left-handed display is restored. The striking display is displayed on the display screen in a large manner. For example, a left-handed display of a large aspect is a right-handed display 657.
The character may be changed to “left-handed” and the direction of the arrow may be reversed. In that case, the left-handed display is
It may be added and displayed so as to be attached to the surface (side surfaces 652a and 652b) of the rectangular parallelepiped object, or may be displayed on the display screen outside the side surfaces 652a and 652b irrespective of the rectangular parallelepiped object. When the left side display is displayed outside the side surfaces 652a and 652b, a part of the left-handed display is displayed outside the display area of the side surfaces 652a and 652b, and the other part is displayed on the side surface 652.
a and 652b may be displayed so as to overlap the display areas of the side surfaces 652a and 652b.

The effect control device 300 adds the special figure 1 hold display 620a and the reserved digest area 640 to the side surface 652a, and adds the special figure 2 hold display 630a and the reserved digest area 640 to the side face 652.
In addition to b, it is displayed on the display screen by perspective (two-point perspective).

After that, in (Cue 5), the rectangular parallelepiped object disappears, and like FIG. (K), the special-figure 1 fluctuation display game, which is the main fluctuation display game, is changed to the fluctuation display area 6 by the main display and sub display.
10 and the variable display area 613.

As described above, in the case of irregular small hits, the first switching effect is used to derive the result of the main variable display game out of the main display in the main display, and then to the small hit result (first special result) of the sub variable display game. Can be switched and displayed. For this reason, it is not possible to cause the player to misunderstand that the main variation display game that is displayed conspicuously has a small hit result. Further, since the main switching display game can be started in the main display by switching from the small hit result of the sub-variable display game to the disapproval result of the main variation display game by the second switching effect, the small hit state (ki) and the normal game There is continuity of display with the state (Chu 5), and there is less discomfort.

As described above, when shifting from (K-3) to (K-4), the next fluctuation has already started, but not after the start of the next fluctuation, but during the small hitting digestion time (here Then, the second switching effect may be executed during the aforementioned irregular small hitting time. By doing so, the game progresses smoothly. In addition, by doing so, the second switching effect makes the effect a little different from the normal small hit state (normal small hit state), thereby making it easier to recognize the irregular small hit and in the effect control device 300 This will reduce the load on image processing (decorated decorative patterns will lighten the image processing for the second switching effect more than the fluctuating decorative patterns)
.

Further, in (ku-1) and (ku-4), the side surfaces 652a, 6 which are partitioned display areas.
When the emphasis effect that emphasizes 52b is executed, the side surfaces 652a and 652b that are visually recognized as if tilted to the back side by the perspective method are easily understood. Side effects 652a and 652b as highlighting effects
Shining the outline of the object or displaying it in a special color (gold), or side surfaces 652a and 652b
It is possible to display an effect image around.

In (K-1) and (K-4), a side image 652a which is a partitioned display area is displayed by displaying a predetermined image (eg, an arrow or a ball) on the display screen or operating a movable accessory. , 65
You may perform the effect which makes a predetermined image and an accessory act on the special figure 1 hold display 620a and the special figure 2 hold display 630a of 2b. And special figure 1 hold display 620a and special figure 2 hold display 6
Corresponding to the action effect for 30a, a hold change effect in which the hold display mode (color, etc.) of the target of the action effect changes from the normal mode may be executed. The hold change effect (hold change notice) here may be performed not after the occurrence of the hold but after the occurrence of the hold. Note that the predetermined image may be displayed in the side surfaces 652a and 652b, which are partitioned display regions (partition regions), or the side surface 65.
2a and 652b may be displayed across the partition area, or part of the side surfaces 652a and 652 may be displayed.
It may be displayed in the partition area 2b and the other part may be displayed outside the partition area.

In addition, during the first switching effect of (K-1), when the aspect of the special figure 1 hold display 620a is changed by the holding change effect (holding change notice), the change is also made in the second switching effect of (K-4). The special figure 1 hold display 620a of the mode which was done is displayed. That is, in (K-1) to (K-4), the special figure 1 hold display 620a once changed maintains the changed mode. Similarly,
Even when the mode of the special figure 2 hold display 630a changes from the normal mode in (K-1),
From K-1) to (K-4), the special figure 2 hold display 630a once changed maintains the changed mode. As described above, the hold display that has been changed once does not return to the original normal state before the change, so that the player does not misunderstand that the hold change is ranked down, and the interest of the game does not deteriorate.

When the aspect of the special figure 1 hold display 620a is changed by the hold change effect (hold change notice) during the first change effect of (K-1), the second change effect of (K-4) starts. Until the start of the second switching effect, the special figure 1 hold display 620a can be returned to the normal mode. In this configuration, in particular, when the special figure 2 hold display 630a is changed due to a big hit, the special figure 1 hold display 620a is in the normal mode in the second switching effect of (K-4). FIG. 2 makes it easier for the player to focus on the hold display 630a.

[Screen transition 2]
FIG. 156A and FIG. 156B are examples of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series with respect to the third embodiment, and are normal in the small hit RUSH state (second specific gaming state in FIG. 116). The case where small hits and irregular small hits occur is shown.

(A) to (ka) in FIG. 156A are the same as (a) to (f) in FIG.
(Sa) corresponds to (ki) to (sa) in FIG. 151B, but in the small hit RUSH state, the main variation display game is a special diagram 2 variation display game, and the secondary variation display game is a special diagram 1 variation display game. This is the opposite of the normal gaming state.

Therefore, in (a) to (sa) in FIG. 156, unlike (a) to (sa) in FIG. 151,
The main display of the main fluctuation display game is not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, but the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and not the special figure 1 hold display 620a and its hold digestion area 640, but the special figure 2 hold display 630a and its hold. The digestion region 640 is displayed on the display screen (second display unit 630). Further, in (a) to (sa) of FIG. 156, the number of holds displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 is mutually different from (a) to (s) in FIG. It has been replaced.

In FIGS. 156A to 156, a right-handed display 658 is always displayed through the small hit RUSH state, the small hit state, and the big hit state.

[Modification of Third Embodiment]
In this modification, unlike the case described above, not only in the regular small hit, but also in the normal small hit that occurs from the normal gaming state, the small hit effect is not executed, and the blessing effect that is performed as part of the small hit effect is also performed. Not executed.

In the hit command processing of FIG. 157, step B21 of the hit command processing of FIG.
02, B2106, B2110, B2114 are steps B2102a, B2106a,
B2110a and B2114a are replaced. Step B2102a, B
In 2106a, B2110a, and B2114a, it is determined whether it is an irregular small hit or a small hit from the normal gaming state, and if the determination is “Y”, the fanfare effect setting process (B2103), the round effect The setting process (B2107), the interval effect setting process (B2111), and the ending effect setting process (B2115) are not executed.

FIG. 158A is a table illustrating the presence / absence of a small hit effect and a big hit effect by the hit command processing with respect to the normal gaming state (left-handed state). Unlike FIG. 147A, even if the result of the main variation display game becomes a small hit result in the first period (in the case of normal small hit), the small hit effect (including the blessing effect) in the second period after the first period. Is not executed.

On the other hand, in the small hit RUSH state (right-handed state) in FIG. 158B, as in FIG. 147B, the result of the main fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) becomes the small hit result in the first period (normally small) In the case of winning), the small hit effect is executed in the second period after the first period.

In FIGS. 158A and 158B, the small hit effect is not executed in the case of an irregular small hit, as in FIGS. 147A and 147B.

FIG. 159 is a screen transition diagram according to this modification, in which only (c) and (d) in FIG. 151A are replaced with (c-1). In (C-1), normal small hits (small hits in the special figure 1 variable display game) have occurred from the normal gaming state, but small hit effects such as small hit fanfare effects and small hit effects are not executed. In (C-1), during the small hit state, the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” of the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed in the first display mode (main display) at the center of the display screen. It ’s just that. Note that the large right-handed display 657 may or may not be displayed.

As described above, in the modified example, when the result of the main variation display game becomes the small hit result in the small hit RUSH state (second gaming state), the blessing effect is generated when the small hit state is generated from the small hit RUSH state. Execute. On the other hand, in the normal game state (first game state), the result of the main variation display game is a small hit result, so that the blessing effect is not executed when the small hit state occurs from the normal game state.

In this way, by not executing the blessing effect when the small hit state occurs from the normal gaming state, the player can impress the blessing effect when the small hit state occurs from the small hit RUSH state. Depending on the state, it is possible to add sharpness in the production. In particular, since the small hit RUSH state is more beneficial to the player than the normal gaming state,
It can be emphasized that the SH state is a gaming state that is beneficial to the player.

[Effects of Third Embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening 36).
) Or a display device 41 that displays a variable display game (decorative display variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on a game ball entering a second start area (for example, the second start winning opening 37).
Display control means (effect control device 300) can be provided, and special game states advantageous to the player (for example, a small hit state, a big hit state) can be generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. It is. In the gaming machine 10, it is recommended that game balls enter the first start area, the first start area becomes the main area (main start area), and the second start area becomes the sub area (sub start area). A first gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a left-handed state) and a game ball entering the second starting area are recommended, the second starting area is the main area, and the first starting area is A second gaming state (for example, a small hit RUSH state or a right-handed state) can be generated. The production control means (production control device 300) can execute a main variation display game based on the game ball entering the main region, and can execute the sub variation display game based on the game ball entering the sub region. It is feasible. Furthermore, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) generates a first special game state (for example, a small hit state) when the result of the main variation display game becomes a first special result (for example, a small hit result). When the first special gaming state occurs when the result of the follow-up display game becomes the first special result while executing the blessing effect for congratulating and notifying the occurrence of the first special gaming state. The blessing effect for congratulating and notifying the occurrence of the first special gaming state is not executed.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when the result of the main variation display game is the first special result (
For example, a blessing effect that congratulates and notifies of the occurrence of the first special gaming state (for example, a small hit state) is executed only in the case of a normal small hit. For this reason, the player comes to enjoy the game in the original way of enjoying (how to hit), and the interest of the game is improved. The result of the follow-up display game is first.
If a congratulatory performance is executed in a case where a special result is obtained (for example, in the case of an irregular small hit), the player tries to generate a lot of follow-up display games, aiming at a start area in which game balls are not recommended to enter. Since the game ball is launched, it is not possible to enjoy the game in the original way of enjoying, and many error notifications of how to hit occur.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is configured to generate the first special game state when the result of the follow-up display game becomes the first special result (for example, irregular small hits). In the case of the main variation display game result other than the first special result (for example, the big hit result) and the second special result (for example, the big hit result) different from the first special result (for example, in the case of a loss) Is displayed on the display device 41.

Therefore, even when the first special game state is generated by the follow-up display game (for example, in the case of irregular small hits), the result of the main display game includes an outlier result other than the special result (chance target design, default design is included) ) And common content display (for example, Special Figure 1)
Hold display 620a, special figure 1 hold number display 650, special figure 2 hold number display 660, etc.) can be displayed on the display device 41. For this reason, the first special gaming state (for example (for example,
Even if a small hit state due to irregular small hits) occurs, the player sees the same display on the display device 41 as in the case of the result of frequent deviation of the main variation display game, and thus does not feel uncomfortable. Sudden occurrence of the first special gaming state due to the follow-up variation display game is reduced.

According to the third embodiment, the production control means, when the first special gaming state (for example, a small hit state due to a normal small hit) occurs when the result of the main variation display game becomes the first special result, When the first special gaming state occurs from the second gaming state (for example, the small hit RUSH state), the blessing effect is executed, but the first special gaming state is generated from the first gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state). If you do, do not perform the blessing production.

Accordingly, when the first special gaming state (for example, a small hit state) occurs from the first gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state), the blessing effect is not executed, so that the second gaming state (for example, the small hit RUSH state) is performed. A congratulatory effect when the first special game state (for example, a small hit state) occurs can be impressed on the player, and a sharpness in the effect can be added according to the game state. In particular, it can be emphasized that the second gaming state is a gaming state that is beneficial to the player when the second gaming state is more beneficial to the player than the first gaming state.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means can put both the main variation display game and the sub variation display game in the running state. Accordingly, the time for digesting the variable display game is increased and the time efficiency is improved. In addition, when the sub-variable display game (or main variable display game) is started after waiting for the end of the main variable display game (or sub-variable display game), the time for digesting the variable display game increases and time efficiency increases. Deteriorate.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means displays the main variation display game based on the game ball entering the main area in the display device 41 rather than the sub variation display game based on the game ball in the sub area. In the case where both the main variation display game and the sub variation display game can be in a running state, and the result of the sub variation display game becomes the first special result (for example, In the case of a regular small hit), the main variation display game is terminated and the main variation display game is set as the specific result, and the specific result (for example, the outlier result) is used as the first special result (for example, the small hit result) of the sub-variable display game. Display larger.

Therefore, when the result of the sub-variable display game is the first special result, the main sub-display game is ended and the specific result (for example, the outlier result) of the main sub-display game is used as the first special result ( For example, if the display is larger than the small hit result), it is possible to prevent the player from making a misunderstanding as if the main variation display game had the first special result. It should be noted that the main variation display game is frequently executed, but if the first special result (for example, a small hit result) suddenly generated in the sub variation display game that is not frequently executed is displayed prominently, it is displayed prominently. There is a possibility that the player will misunderstand as if the main variation display game that had been played has the first special result.

According to the third embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes start memory means capable of storing start memory as a right to execute the main variation display game based on the game ball entering the main area. The effect control means displays a start memory display corresponding to the start memory that is the right to execute the main variable display game when the result of the follow variable display game is the first special result (for example, in the case of irregular small hits). It can be displayed on the device 41.

Therefore, even when the result of the sub-variable display game becomes the first special result (for example, the small hit result), the start memory display for the main variable display game can be continuously displayed on the display device. For this reason, a situation in which the start memory display for the follow-up display game is displayed on the display device 41 in response to the result of the follow-up display game being the first special result (for example, the small hit result) is prevented. it can.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means is configured such that the result of the main variation display game or the follow variation display game becomes the second special result (for example, the big hit result) different from the first special result (for example, the big hit result). When two special game states (for example, a big hit state) occur, a display (for example, a right-handed display 657) for recommending the player to enter the game ball into the second starting area is displayed in the first mode (
For example, it is displayed in a large form) and the result of the follow-up display game becomes the first special result.
When a special gaming state of (for example, an irregular small hit) occurs, a display (for example, a right-handed display 658) for recommending the player to enter the game ball into the second starting area is the first. In a second mode (for example, a small mode) different from the above mode.

Accordingly, when the first special game state (for example, a small hit state due to irregular small hits) occurs when the result of the follow-up display game becomes the first special result, the second special game state (for example, big hit state) ) In a mode (for example, a small mode) that is less conspicuous than the first mode (for example, a large mode) in FIG. Can be displayed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying that the main variation display game that is displayed largely has a first special result (for example, a small hit result).

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means can execute the main variation display game based on the game ball entering the main region, and the sub variation display based on the game ball entering the sub region. The game can be executed, and both the main variation display game and the sub variation display game can be executed. The result of the sub variation display game is the first special result (for example, a small hit result). In this case, the main variation display game is terminated and the main variation display game is set as a specific result (for example, an outlier result), and the specific result of the main variation display game and the first special result of the sub variation display game are displayed on the display device. A switching effect for switching and displaying at is executed.

Therefore, when the result of the follow-up display game is the first special result (for example, in the case of irregular small hits), the change result is used to derive the specific result (for example, the outlier result) of the main change display game and then follow it. The display can be switched to the first special result (for example, a small hit result) of the variable display game. For this reason, the player will not be misidentified as if the main variation display game that is displayed conspicuously has the first special result (for example, a small hit result). In addition, the main variation display game can be started by switching from the first special result (for example, the small hit result) of the sub-variable display game to the specific result (for example, the loss result) of the main variation display game by the switching effect. There is sex and less discomfort.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means can execute a main variation display game based on the game ball entering the main region, and the sub variation display game based on the game ball entering the sub region. Can be executed, and both the main variation display game and the sub variation display game can be executed, and the main variation display is performed when the result of the sub variation display game is the first special result. The game is interrupted, the main variation display game is set to a specific mode, and a switching effect is performed in which the specific mode of the main variation display game and the first special result of the sub variation display game are switched and displayed on the display device.

Therefore, when the result of the sub-variable display game is the first special result (for example, in the case of irregular small hits), the main variation display game is interrupted by the switching effect and the main variation display game is specified (for example, , Fluctuations that are different from those before the interruption, etc., and then the first special result (for example, a small hit result) of the follow-up display game can be switched to display. For this reason, the player will not be misidentified as if the main variation display game that is displayed conspicuously has the first special result (for example, a small hit result). In addition, the switching effect switches from the first special result (for example, the small hit result) of the follow-up display game to the specific mode of the main display game,
Since the main variation display game can be started, there is a continuity of display and the uncomfortable feeling is reduced.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means displays the main variation display game based on the game ball entering the main area in a first display mode (for example, a large display mode) and a second display mode (for example, a small display mode). Can be displayed on the display device 41. Further, the effect control means can display a follow-up variation display game based on the game ball entering the follow-up area on the display device, and is executing both the main-change display game and the follow-up change display game. It is possible to be in a state. When the result of the secondary variation display game is the first special result (for example, a small hit result), the main variation display game is terminated and the main variation display game is set as the specific result (for example, the off result). It is not displayed in the first display mode, but is displayed on the display device 41 in the second display mode.

Therefore, when the result of the follow-up display game is the first special result (for example, a small hit result),
The main variation display game is ended, and the specific result (for example, the disapproval result) of the main variation display game is displayed only in the second display mode (for example, small display mode), and is not displayed in the first display mode (for example, large display mode). . For this reason, the player does not make a misunderstanding as if the main variation display game displayed in the first display mode has reached the first special result (for example, the small hit result). Also,
When the follow-up display game based on the game ball entering the follow-up area can be displayed on the display device 41 smaller than the main-display display game in the first display mode, the main display is displayed in a large display in the first display mode. The player is not mistaken as if the game had a first special result (for example, a small hit result).

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means displays the main variation display game based on the game ball entering the main area in a first display mode (for example, a large display mode) and a second display mode (for example, a small display mode). Can be displayed on the display device 41. Further, the effect control means can display a follow-up variation display game based on the game ball entering the follow-up area on the display device, and is executing both the main-change display game and the follow-up change display game. It is possible to be in a state. When the result of the sub-variable display game is the first special result (for example, a small hit result), the main variable display game is interrupted and not displayed in the first display mode, but displayed on the display device 41 in the second display mode. To do.

Therefore, when the result of the follow-up display game is the first special result (for example, a small hit result),
While the main variation display game is interrupted, the game is displayed only in the second display mode (for example, a small display mode) and not displayed in the first display mode (for example, a large display mode). For this reason, the player does not make a misunderstanding as if the main variation display game displayed in the first display mode has reached the first special result (for example, the small hit result). In addition, if the follow-up display game based on the game ball entering the sub-region can be displayed on the display device 41 smaller than the main display game in the first display mode, the main display displayed in the first display mode is large. The player is not mistaken as if the variable display game had a first special result (for example, a small hit result).

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is obvious that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, a plurality of embodiments can be combined. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (such as slot machines). The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 12 front frame (game frame)
25 Production buttons 30 Game board 32 Game area 36 First start prize opening (first start prize area)
37 Second start prize opening (second start prize area)
38 1st special variation winning device 39 2nd special variation winning device 40 center case 41 display device 44 board directing device 46 board decoration device 50 collective display device (LED)
100 Game control device (main board)
200 payout control device 300 effect control device (sub-board)
400 power supply

Claims (2)

Based on the entry of the game ball into the first start area or the second start area, the display apparatus includes presentation control means capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the result of the variable display game In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when
A first game state in which a game ball is recommended to enter the first start area, the first start area is a main area, and the second start area is a sub area,
A game ball entering the second start area is recommended, and a second game state in which the second start area becomes a main area and the first start area becomes a sub area can be generated,
The production control means includes
A main variation display game can be executed based on the game ball entering the main region, and a sub variation display game can be executed based on the game ball entering the sub region,
Both the main variation display game and the sub variation display game can be in a running state,
When the result of the follow variation display game is a first special result, the main variation display game is ended and the main variation display game is set as the specific result, and the specific result of the main variation display game and the follow variation display are displayed. Executing a switching effect for switching and displaying the first special result of the game on the display device;
A gaming machine characterized by not performing a blessing effect for congratulating and notifying the occurrence of a first special gaming state that occurs when the result of the follow-up display game becomes the first special result. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first start area or the second start area, the display apparatus includes presentation control means capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the result of the variable display game In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when
A first game state in which a game ball is recommended to enter the first start area, the first start area is a main area, and the second start area is a sub area,
A game ball entering the second start area is recommended, and a second game state in which the second start area becomes a main area and the first start area becomes a sub area can be generated,
The production control means includes
A main variation display game can be executed based on the game ball entering the main region, and a sub variation display game can be executed based on the game ball entering the sub region,
Both the main variation display game and the sub variation display game can be in a running state,
When the result of the follow variation display game is a first special result, the main variation display game is interrupted to make the main variation display game a specific mode, and the specific mode of the main variation display game and the sub variation display Executing a switching effect for switching and displaying the first special result of the game on the display device;
A gaming machine characterized by not performing a blessing effect for congratulating and notifying the occurrence of a first special gaming state that occurs when the result of the follow-up display game becomes the first special result.

Images